201
Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Test Signal Generator Version 2.0 April 2015 Installation and Operation Manual

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    3

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Test Signal Generator

Version 2.0

April 2015

Installation and Operation Manual

Page 2: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Test Signal Generator Installation and Operation Manual

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 2

Publication Information © 2015 Imagine Communications Corp.

Proprietary and Confidential.

Imagine Communications considers this document and its contents to be proprietary and confidential. Except for making a reasonable number of copies for your own internal use, you may not reproduce this publication, or any part thereof, in any form, by any method, for any purpose, or in any language other than English without the written consent of Imagine Communications. All others uses are illegal.

This publication is designed to assist in the use of the product as it exists on the date of publication of this manual, and may not reflect the product at the current time or an unknown time in the future. This publication does not in any way warrant description accuracy or guarantee the use for the product to which it refers. Imagine Communications reserves the right, without notice to make such changes in equipment, design, specifications, components, or documentation as progress may warrant to improve the performance of the product.

Trademarks

Videotek® VSG and VSG-4TSG™ are trademarks or trade names of Imagine Communications or its subsidiaries.

Microsoft® and Windows® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective companies.

Contact Information

Imagine Communications has office locations around the world. For domestic and international location and contact information, visit our Contact page (http://www.imaginecommunications.com/company/contact-us.aspx).

Support Contact Information

For domestic and international support contact information see:

Support Contacts (http://www.imaginecommunications.com/services/customer-care.aspx)

eCustomer Portal (http://support.imaginecommunications.com)

Academy Training (http://www.imaginecommunicationsacademy.com)

Page 3: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™

Installation and Operation Manual Quick Start

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 3

Quick Start

Main Display Setup

1. Press .

2. Down arrow button until the display shows Unit Configuration under Setup.

3. Press .

4. Down arrow button until the display shows Front Panel under Unit Configuration.

5. Press .

6. Down arrow button until the display shows Default Status Display under Front Panel.

7. Press .

8. Press and to view the options:

Time (default)

Generator and Time

Generator

9. When the display shows the option you want, press to select.

10. Press once, and then press once and see Default Time Source under Front Panel.

11. Press and to view the options.

The default is Local Time.

12. When the display shows the option you want, press to select it.

13. Press four times to return to the main display.

Primary or Secondary Source Select

1. Press and hold or until the display updates to show the selected source.

Figure 1: Screen After Holding Down the PRI button

2. Press and to view the list of available sources.

Page 4: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™

Installation and Operation Manual Quick Start

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 4

3. When the display shows the option you want, press to select.

4. Press three times to return to the main display.

For more information about primary and secondary sources, see Sources.

Format and Rate Selection SD/HD/3G-SDI

1. Press and hold until the display updates to show the selected output.

2. Use and to find SDI 1 or SDI 2, and press .

SDI 2 will follow SDI 1 unless deselected in the SDI 2 > Output Select menu.

3. Press until the display shows Standard.

4. Press twice.

5. The display updates to show the currently selected standard.

6. Press and to choose between the following:

SD

HD

DL HD

3G Level A

3G Level B GL

3G Level B DS

7. When the display shows the option you want, press to select.

8. Press and then press until the display shows Format.

9. Press .

10. Press and to view the available formats.

11. When the display shows the option you want, press to select.

12. Press , and then press until the display shows Field/Frame Rate.

13. Press and to view the available field rates.

14. When the display shows the option you want, press to select.

15. Press five times to return to the main display.

For more information about formats and rates, see Setup Menu Functions.

Page 5: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™

Installation and Operation Manual Quick Start

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 5

Format and rate selection PGM 1 (analog composite or sync)

1. Press and hold until the display appears as below:

Figure 2: Main Output Display

2. Press until the display shows PGM 1.

3. Press twice.

4. Press and to choose between Composite (default) or Sync.

5. Press and then press .

6. Press to choose either Composite or Sync, depending on your previous selection, and then press

.

7. Press and to select one of the following:

Lock Source (Sync only)

Format

Frame Rate (Sync only)

For each item, press , and then use and to choose the option you want.

8. Press again to make your selection.

9. Repeat step 7 for each output parameter.

Format and rate selection PGM 2 or 3 (AES or analog sync)

1. Press and hold until the display appears as Figure .

2. Press to PGM 2 or PGM 3.

3. Press twice, select one of the following:

Sync (default)

AES

4. Press once and then press once.

5. Press to Sync and press .

6. Press and to select one of the following (for Sync only):

Lock Source

Page 6: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™

Installation and Operation Manual Quick Start

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 6

Format

Frame Rate

For each item, press , and then use and to choose the option you want.

7. Press again to make your selection.

8. Press to go up one level and make another selection, or if configuration is complete, press

five times to return to the default display.

GPS setup

Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 receiver

The GPS-3904 includes a 10 MHz reference for accommodating applications requiring sub-microsecond timing, recommended for time of day/date, video, audio and time code reference applications.

Connect the optional breakout module to the 26-pin connector on the back of the VSG-4TSG.

1. Attach the RS-232 cable to the 9-pin male connector on the breakout board.

2. Use two standard BNC cables to connect 10MHz and PPS from the GPS 3904 receiver to the 10MHz and PPS inputs on the back of the VSG-4TSG.

For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver.

Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903 The GPS-3903 is being replaced by the GPS-3903-2.

To connect the VSG-4TSG system to a GPS-3903 or GPS-3903-2 receiver, use a CAB-CSD-GPS3901 cable.

1. Connect the optional breakout module to the 26-pin connector on the back of the VSG-4TSG.

2. Attach the RS-232 cable to Port 2 of the GPS 3903 receiver.

3. Attach the other end of the RS-232 cable to the 9-pin male connector on the breakout board.

4. Attach the cable’s Weidmuller 3-pin female connector to the 3 pin male connector labeled PPS in on the breakout board. Ensure that the screw heads are face up when inserting this connector.

For more information, see Setting Hardware Parameters.

VSG-4TSG GPS menu setup for GPS 3903/GPS-3904

1. On the VSG-4TSG press SETUP and then press .

The Sources menu appears.

Page 7: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™

Installation and Operation Manual Quick Start

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 7

2. Press to find GPS Config, as shown below.

Figure 3: Sources Display

3. Press twice to select the device.

4. Press and to select either:

GPS-3903

GPS-3904 (default)

5. Press to select it.

A checkmark will appear in front of the GPS-3903 or GPS-3904.

6. Press four times to return to the default display.

7. Press the SRC button to enter the Source Status Display window.

8. Press u and to find GPS, and press to enter the GPS Status page.

9. Press and to check GPS status.

Note: The GPS-3904 may take 1-2 hours to power up.

For more information, see Sources (on page 95).

Page 8: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™

Installation and Operation Manual Contents

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 8

Contents

Quick Start ............................................................................................................. 3

Main Display Setup ................................................................................................................................... 3

Primary or Secondary Source Select .................................................................................................... 3

Format and Rate Selection SD/HD/3G-SDI ........................................................................................... 4

Format and rate selection PGM 1 (analog composite or sync) ............................................................ 5

Format and rate selection PGM 2 or 3 (AES or analog sync) ............................................................... 5

GPS setup .................................................................................................................................................. 6

Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 receiver ............................................................................... 6

Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903 ............................................................................................ 6

VSG-4TSG GPS menu setup for GPS 3903/GPS-3904 ........................................................................... 6

About This Manual ............................................................................................... 13

Intended Audience ................................................................................................................................. 13

Manual Information ............................................................................................................................... 13

Revision History .................................................................................................................................. 13

Writing Conventions ........................................................................................................................... 13

Obtaining Documents ......................................................................................................................... 14

Operator’s Safety Summary ................................................................................................................... 14

Important Safety Instructions ............................................................................................................ 14

Ensuring Safety ................................................................................................................................... 15

Explanation of Symbols and Safety Terms ......................................................................................... 17

Certification Labels and Symbol Locations ......................................................................................... 17

Directives and Compliances.................................................................................................................... 17

Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive ..................................................................... 18

Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive .................................................. 18

Introduction ......................................................................................................... 20

Product Features .................................................................................................................................... 20

Standard Features .............................................................................................................................. 20

Options ............................................................................................................................................... 21

Applicable Standards .............................................................................................................................. 22

Safety ...................................................................................................................................................... 24

VSG-4TSG Service and Support............................................................................................................... 24

Page 9: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™

Installation and Operation Manual Contents

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 9

Returning a Product ........................................................................................................................... 24

Installation ........................................................................................................... 26

Inspecting the Shipment ......................................................................................................................... 26

Unpacking/Shipping Information ........................................................................................................... 26

Unpacking a Product .......................................................................................................................... 26

Rack Mounting the VSG-4TSG ............................................................................................................ 27

Connecting the VSG-4TSG ...................................................................................................................... 29

Optional Breakout Module with Five Foot Cable ................................................................................... 30

3-Pin Weidmuller Connector (PPS In)................................................................................................. 32

Screw Clamp Terminals ...................................................................................................................... 32

DIP Switch ........................................................................................................................................... 34

TIA/EIA-574 (RS-232) 9-Pin Serial Connector ..................................................................................... 35

System Connections ............................................................................................................................... 35

Connecting the GPS Antenna and Receiver ....................................................................................... 35

Ethernet Setup ................................................................................................................................... 39

Theory of Operation ............................................................................................ 42

Time Base Definitions ............................................................................................................................. 42

VSG-4TSG Time Inputs ............................................................................................................................ 43

User Configurable Local Time ................................................................................................................. 44

Source Detection and Failover ............................................................................................................... 45

Failover Return ....................................................................................................................................... 45

Source-To-Internal Time Keeping Engine (ITKE) Synchronization .......................................................... 46

Internal Time Keeping ............................................................................................................................ 46

VSG-4TSG Time Outputs ......................................................................................................................... 46

Output Rules ....................................................................................................................................... 47

Local Time Display .............................................................................................................................. 48

Configuring NTP Output Time ............................................................................................................ 48

Configuring PTP Output Time ............................................................................................................. 48

Configuring LTC Output Time ............................................................................................................. 48

Configuring VITC Output Time ........................................................................................................... 48

Configuring DVITC Output Time ......................................................................................................... 49

Configuring ATC Output Time ............................................................................................................ 49

Front Panel Operation ......................................................................................... 50

Directly Selecting Specific Function(s) .................................................................................................... 50

Accessing a Function-Specific Setup Menu ........................................................................................ 50

Leaving the Setup Menu..................................................................................................................... 50

Panel Controls......................................................................................................................................... 51

Page 10: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™

Installation and Operation Manual Contents

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 10

Display Window .................................................................................................................................. 53

Setup Display .......................................................................................................................................... 56

Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI ................................................................................ 59

System Requirements ............................................................................................................................. 59

Logging in to the VSG-4TSG Interface .................................................................................................... 59

Installing Silverlight................................................................................................................................. 60

Exiting the VSG-4TSG Interface .............................................................................................................. 60

Navigating the VSG-4TSG Interface ........................................................................................................ 61

Active Faults Panel ............................................................................................................................. 61

Summary Panel ................................................................................................................................... 63

Using the Configuration Tools ................................................................................................................ 64

Parameter Control .............................................................................................................................. 65

Upgrade Firmware .............................................................................................................................. 70

Bitmap Management .......................................................................................................................... 72

Wave Management ............................................................................................................................ 74

Device Information ............................................................................................................................. 75

User Account ...................................................................................................................................... 77

Using the Faults and Events Tab ............................................................................................................. 79

Active Faults Tab ................................................................................................................................ 79

Live Events Tab ................................................................................................................................... 80

Log Tab ............................................................................................................................................... 81

Using Presets .......................................................................................................................................... 83

Creating a Preset ................................................................................................................................ 84

Loading a Preset ................................................................................................................................. 84

Renaming a Preset .............................................................................................................................. 84

Using Factory Recall ........................................................................................................................... 85

Deleting a Preset ................................................................................................................................ 85

Overwriting a Preset ........................................................................................................................... 86

Exporting a Preset .............................................................................................................................. 86

Importing a Preset .............................................................................................................................. 86

Faults Tab................................................................................................................................................ 87

Configuring Module Faults ................................................................................................................. 87

Faults List ............................................................................................................................................ 88

Modifying a Fault's Properties ........................................................................................................... 90

Parameters and Functions ................................................................................... 91

Block Diagram Parameter Organization ................................................................................................. 91

All List Parameter Organization .............................................................................................................. 95

Sources ............................................................................................................................................... 95

Page 11: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™

Installation and Operation Manual Contents

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 11

Outputs ............................................................................................................................................. 100

Other ................................................................................................................................................ 133

Unit Configuration ............................................................................................................................ 133

Status ................................................................................................................................................ 137

Troubleshooting ................................................................................................. 151

Initial Checks ......................................................................................................................................... 151

Restarting ............................................................................................................................................. 151

Problems, Causes, and Solutions .......................................................................................................... 152

Identifying GPS-3903 or GPS-3903-2 .................................................................................................... 153

Specifications ..................................................................................................... 154

Inputs .................................................................................................................................................... 154

Outputs ................................................................................................................................................. 155

PGM 1 ............................................................................................................................................... 155

PGM 2/3 ........................................................................................................................................... 157

SDI 1/2 .............................................................................................................................................. 158

LTC .................................................................................................................................................... 159

Sync 1 ............................................................................................................................................... 160

Audio .................................................................................................................................................... 161

Standard and Optional Accessories ...................................................................................................... 163

Pinouts ............................................................................................................... 164

26-Pin D-Sub Connector ....................................................................................................................... 164

Analog Audio Connector ....................................................................................................................... 165

Ethernet RJ45 Connector ...................................................................................................................... 166

Power Connector .................................................................................................................................. 166

SNMP Agent and MIBs ....................................................................................... 167

The SNMP Agent ................................................................................................................................... 167

SNMP Agent Formats ....................................................................................................................... 167

Range and Community Levels .......................................................................................................... 167

Behavior ........................................................................................................................................... 168

MIB ....................................................................................................................................................... 168

Format .............................................................................................................................................. 168

Range ................................................................................................................................................ 169

Behavior ........................................................................................................................................... 169

MIB Definition File ............................................................................................................................ 175

Glossary of Terms .............................................................................................. 176

Page 12: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™

Installation and Operation Manual Contents

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 12

Open Source Software Copyright Information ................................................... 183

PTP License ........................................................................................................................................... 183

FreeType License .................................................................................................................................. 183

LibJPEG License ..................................................................................................................................... 183

CMU/UCD Copyright Notice ................................................................................................................. 183

Networks Associates Technology, Inc. Copyright Notice (BSD) ........................................................... 184

Cambridge Broadband Ltd. Copyright Notice (BSD) ............................................................................. 185

Sun Microsystems, Inc. Copyright Notice (BSD) ................................................................................... 185

Sparta, Inc. Copyright Notice (BSD) ...................................................................................................... 186

Cisco/BUPTNIC Copyright Notice (BSD) ................................................................................................ 186

Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co. KG Copyright Notice (BSD) ........................................................ 187

The GNU v2 License .............................................................................................................................. 188

GNU General Public License ............................................................................................................. 188

GNU General Public License ............................................................................................................. 189

GNU Lesser Public License .................................................................................................................... 192

GNU Lesser General Public License .................................................................................................. 192

GNU Lesser General Public License .................................................................................................. 194

Index .................................................................................................................. 200

Page 13: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™

Installation and Operation Manual About This Manual

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 13

About This Manual This manual details the features, installation procedures, operational procedures, and specifications of the VSG-4TSGTM Test Signal Generator.

The About This Manual section provides an overview of this installation and operation manual, describes manual conventions, and tells you where to look for specific information. This section also gives you important information on unpacking and shipping your product.

Intended Audience This manual is written for operators, technicians, and engineers responsible for the installation, setup, and / or operation of the VSG-4TSG Test Signal Generator.

Manual Information This section provides information about the revision history of the manual, writing conventions used for ease of understanding as well as for navigation throughout the document, and information about obtaining other product manuals.

Revision History

Table 1: Manual Revision History

Edition Date Revision History

A April 2013 Initial release

2.0 April 2015 Enhancement of Web user interface and addition of new features

Writing Conventions

To enhance your understanding, the authors of this manual have adhered to the following text conventions:

Page 14: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™

Installation and Operation Manual About This Manual

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 14

Table 2: Manual Style and Writing Conventions

Term or Convention

Description

Bold Indicates dialog boxes, property sheets, fields, buttons, check boxes, list boxes, combo boxes, menus, submenus, windows, lists, and selection names

Italics Indicates email addresses, the names of books or publications, and the first instances of new terms and specialized words that need emphasis

CAPS Indicates a specific key on the keyboard, such as ENTER, TAB, CTRL, ALT, or DELETE

Code Indicates variables or command-line entries, such as a DOS entry or something you type into a field

> or Indicates the direction of navigation through a hierarchy of menus and windows

hyperlink Indicates a jump to another location within the electronic document or elsewhere

Internet address Indicates a jump to a website or URL

Note: Indicates important information that helps to avoid and troubleshoot problems

Obtaining Documents

The installation and operation manuals for most Imagine Communications products are available on our website as individual Adobe Acrobat PDF files. Most software applications include Online Help (electronic documents integrated into their respective software applications). While working in the application, you can open the Online Help and print out individual topics.

The most up-to-date documentation and software is always available on our website.

Operator’s Safety Summary

WARNING: These instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not perform this installation or any servicing unless you are qualified to do so. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

Important Safety Instructions Read these instructions.

Keep these instructions.

Heed all warnings.

Follow all instructions.

Page 15: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™

Installation and Operation Manual About This Manual

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 15

Do not use this apparatus near water.

Clean only with dry cloth.

Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade (or the third prong) is provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.

Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.

Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.

Norway and Sweden "Utrustning som är kopplad till skyddsjord via jordat vägguttag och/eller via annan utrustning och samtidigt är kopplad till kabel-TV nät kan i vissa fall medfõra risk fõr brand. Fõr att undvika detta skall vid anslutning av utrustningen till kabel-TV nät galvanisk isolator finnas mellan utrustningen och kabel-TV nätet."

Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.

Figure 4: Portable Cart Warning

Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.

Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.

The device's IEC power connector shall remain readily accessible.

Ensuring Safety If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by

the equipment may be impaired.

The unit should not be exposed to dripping or splashing, and no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the unit.

Page 16: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™

Installation and Operation Manual About This Manual

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 16

When the unit is to be permanently cabled, connect the protective ground conductor before making any other connections.

Operate built in units only when they are properly fitted into the system.

For permanently cabled units without built in fuses, automatic switches, or similar protective facilities, the AC supply line must be fitted with fuses rated to the units.

Before switching on the unit, ensure that the operating voltage set at the unit matches the line voltage, if appropriate. If a different operating voltage is to be set, use a fuse with the appropriate rating. Refer to the Installation Instructions.

Units of Protection Class I with an AC supply cable and plug that can be disconnected must be operated only from a power socket with protective ground contact:

Do not use an extension cable–it can render the protective ground connection ineffective.

Do not intentionally interrupt the protective ground conductor.

Do not break the protective ground conductor inside or outside the unit or loosen the protective ground connection; such actions can cause the unit to become electrically hazardous.

Before opening the unit, isolate it from the AC supply. Then, ensure that

Adjustments, part replacements, maintenance, and repairs are carried out by qualified personnel only.

Safety regulations and rules are observed to prevent accidents.

Only original parts are used to replace parts relevant to safety (for example, the power on/off switches, power transformers, and fuses).

Replaceable fuses can be hazardous when live. Before replacing a fuse, disconnect the AC power source.

Imagine Communications does not recommend internal battery replacement by the user.

Dispose of used batteries according to the battery’s disposal instructions.

CAUTION: Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type.

Use caution when cleaning the equipment; isopropyl alcohol or similar solvents can damage or remove the labels.

Observe any additional safety instructions specified in this manual.

Page 17: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™

Installation and Operation Manual About This Manual

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 17

Explanation of Symbols and Safety Terms

These symbols may appear on Imagine Communications equipment:

Figure 5: Safety Terms and Symbols Appearing on Imagine Communications Equipment

This product manual uses the following safety terms to identify certain conditions or practices.

Table 3: Safety Terms Appearing in the Product Manual

WARNING

Identifies conditions or practices that can result in personal injury or loss of life — high voltage is present. Uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product’s enclosure may be sufficient to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

CAUTION

Identifies conditions or practices that can result in damage to the equipment or other property. Important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions are included in the literature accompanying the product.

Certification Labels and Symbol Locations

On Imagine Communications equipment, certification labels and symbols are located on the back panel, rear chassis sides, or bottom rear of the chassis. On smaller space-restricted units, most labels and symbols can be found on the bottom rear of the chassis.

Directives and Compliances This section provides information concerning Imagine Communications compliance with EU Directive 2002/95/EC and EU Directive 2002/96/EC.

Page 18: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™

Installation and Operation Manual About This Manual

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 18

Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive

Directive 2002 / 95 / EC — commonly known as the European Union (EU) Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) — sets limits on the use of certain substances found in electrical and electronic equipment. The intent of this legislation is to reduce the amount of hazardous chemicals that may leach out of landfill sites or otherwise contaminate the environment during end-of-life recycling. The Directive, which took effect on July 1, 2006, refers to the following hazardous substances:

Lead (Pb)

Mercury (Hg)

Cadmium (Cd)

Hexavalent Chromium (Cr-V1)

Polybrominated Biphenyls (PBB)

Polybrominated Diphenyl Ethers (PBDE)

In accordance with this EU Directive, products sold in the European Union will be fully RoHS-compliant and "lead-free." Spare parts supplied for the repair and upgrade of equipment sold before July 1, 2006 are exempt from the legislation. Equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with a RoHS-compliant symbol.

Figure 6: RoHS Compliance Symbol

Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive

The European Union (EU) Directive 2002 / 96 / EC on Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) deals with the collection, treatment, recovery, and recycling of electrical and electronic waste products. The objective of the WEEE Directive is to assign the responsibility for the disposal of associated hazardous waste to either the producers or users of these products. As of August 13, 2005, producers or users are required to recycle electrical and electronic equipment at end of its useful life, and must not dispose of the equipment in landfills or by using other unapproved methods. (Some EU member states may have different deadlines.)

Page 19: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™

Installation and Operation Manual About This Manual

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 19

In accordance with this EU Directive, companies selling electric or electronic devices in the EU will affix labels indicating that such products must be properly recycled. Contact your local Sales representative for information on returning these products for recycling. Equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with a WEEE-compliant symbol.

Figure 7: WEEE Compliance Symbol

Page 20: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 1

Installation and Operation Manual Introduction

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 20

Introduction The VSG-4TSG is a test signal generator with a clock system driver. The generator supports SD, HD, 3G (Level A and B), dual-link, dual-stream, and 2K video formats. The clock system driver supports time information from various sources, including Linear Time Code (LTC), Vertical Interval Time Code (VITC), Global Positioning Systems (GPS), Precision Time Protocol (PTP master), and Network Time Protocol (NTP servers).

An internal timing engine processes the incoming reference information, makes appropriate conversions to different time bases and maintains a consistent time base which is used to drive the unit's outputs. Using a combination of parameters such as leap second information, DST rules, and offset values, the VSG-4TSG can be configured to convert incoming International Atomic Time (TAI) to other time bases. This time is then distributed to the module's outputs as time and date information, and black burst video reference signals.

The VSG-4TSG has a simple user interface to configure it in the most direct means possible.

Product Features The VSG-4TSG includes the following standard and optional features.

Standard Features

Inputs

Genlock to standard color black (NTSC - SMPTE 170M and PAL - ITU-R BT. 470-5)

Genlock to Tri-level sync (SMPTE 240M/274M/296M)

Support for various time code formats and time code user bit formats, including SMPTE/EBU drop frame or non-drop time code format

GPS support via PPS and RS-232 interface; optional GPS-3904 recommended for 10 MHz, PPS and RS-232 interface support

NTP support and PTP support via a network connection

VITC support from black burst inputs

LTC support

GPI I/O

Redundant external power supplies

Outputs

Two SDI test signal outputs with selectable video format, frame rate and test signal

Chapter 1

Page 21: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 1

Installation and Operation Manual Introduction

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 21

One analog sync output, configurable as color black/black burst or Tri-Level sync

Two PGM as unbalanced AES or Sync (color black/black burst or tri-level sync)

One PGM as analog composite video test or sync (color black/black burst or tri-level sync)

VITC support on black burst, D-VITC and ATC support on SDI output

AFD/WSS/VI support on SDI output

Two LTC outputs

Support for Digital Audio Reference Signal (DARS) or Word Clock on a shared BNC

Two balanced analog audio outputs

Two balanced AES outputs

Capabilities for up to 16 channels of embedded audio, enabled by group

Processing Features

Test signals in a variety of bars and patterns

Configurable Daylight Savings Time and Leap Second Change auto detection for some input sources

User-definable scheduled call outs to time reference sources, such as GPS receivers

User-programmable delays for input and output, offsets, time code offsets, output phasing, and input and output jam syncs

Display of current video setup, local time, and date on a menu-driven front panel interface

Continuous motion overlaid on the pattern

The capability to overlay up to 19 characters of source ID within the test pattern

Global audio selections to adjust amplitude and frequency

Customized .bmp or .jpeg files as video test signals.

Customized .wav files as audio test signals.

Dolby E and Dolby D audio signal generator.

Audio sequence test signals for channel identification and loudness measurement etc.

Options

Table 4: VSG-4TSG Optional Features and Descriptions

Option Description

Redundant System

VSG-4SYS-T VSG-4TSG System includes 2 VSG-4TSG , 1 VSX-11-3G, 1 DRT-5, 1 RMT-U1, 2 VSG-4-BRK-1

Options

VSG-4-BRK-1 Breakout panel and 5 ft (1.5 m) cable with HD26 pin DSUB Male to Female connectors for the VSG-4 series

RMT-U1 Rack Mount Tray Universal. Holds up to 8 VSG-4 series power supplies or a combination of items

Page 22: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 1

Installation and Operation Manual Introduction

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 22

Option Description

DRT-5 Dual Rack Mount Tray for VSG-4 Series and DL-870 products, BLK-5 blank front filler available (DRT-ADP-1 DRT adaptor required for installing DRT-4 products in the DRT-5 rack tray (CMN-41, CMN-MV, LLM-1770, VSG-401)

BLK-5 Blank panel for left or right side of DRT-4A or DRT-5

PSU-12-1 External Power Supply Unit 12 VDC output with threaded coupling ring, input 90 to 264 VAC

Automatic Changeover

PSU-12-1 External Power Supply Unit 12 VDC output with threaded coupling ring, input 90 to 264 VAC

Optional GPS Antenna and Receiver

GPS-3902-RM Rackmount Kit, holds up to two GPS-3903, GPS-3903-2, or GPS-3904 receivers

GPS-3904 GPS Antenna and Receiver kit, 110-240 VAC operation, serial data, 10 MHz and PPS outputs, includes AC power supply, RG-59 antenna cable (23m/75ft), for use with VSG-4MTG, VSG-4CSD, VSG-4TSG and VSG-4TCG for time/date and video/audio timecode applications

The GPS-3904 includes a 10 MHz reference for accommodating applications requiring sub-microsecond timing, recommended for time of day/date, video, audio and time code reference applications.

GPS-3903-2 GPS Antenna and Receiver Kit, 110-240 VAC operation, serial data and PPS outputs, includes AC power supply, RG-59 antenna cable (23m/75ft) and RS-232/PPS adapter cable for VSG-4TCG and VSG-4CSD for time/date applications (not for use with NEO MTG-3901, CSD-3902, TSG-3901, GPS-3904 recommended)

Applicable Standards AES3-2003 AES Recommended Practice for Digital Audio Engineering–

Serial Transmission Format for Two-Channel Linearly Represented Digital Audio Data

AES11-1997 AES recommended practice for digital audio engineering – Synchronization of digital audio equipment in studio operations

SMPTE-12M-1 Time and Control Code

SMPTE-12M-2 Transmission of Time Code in the Ancillary Data Space

ST 125M:1995 Component Video Signal 4:2:2-Bit-Parallel Digital Interface

ST RP-168 Definition of Vertical Interval Switching Point for Synchronous Video Switching

Page 23: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 1

Installation and Operation Manual Introduction

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 23

ST RP 184-2004 Specification of Jitter in Bit-Serial Digital Systems

ST 259M:1997 SDTV Digital Signal/Data-Serial Digital Interface

ANSI/ST 259M-C 270 Mbps serial interface - 144/243/270/360 Mb/s SDI

ST 272M:2004 Formatting Digital AES Audio and Auxiliary Data into Digital Video Ancillary Data Space

ST 274: 2008 1920 x 1080 Image Sample Structure, Digital Representation and Digital Timing Reference Sequences for Multiple Picture Rates (1080i/60, 1080i/59.94, 1080i/50, 1080p/30, 1080p/29.97, 1080p/25,1080p/24, 1080p/23.98)

ST 276M Transmission of AES/EBU Digital Audio Signals Over Coaxial Cable

ST 291M:2006 Ancillary Data Packet and Space Formatting

ST 292M:2008 1.5 Gb/s Signal/Data Serial Interface

ST 296M:2001 1280×720 Progressive Image Sample Structure-Analog and Digital Representation and Analog Interface

ST 299M :2004 24-bit AES digital audio Format for SMPTE 292 Bit-Serial Interface

ST 352M:2002 Video Payload Identification for Digital Interfaces

ST 377M Format for Non-PCM Audio and Data in an AES3 Serial Digital Audio Interface

ST 372M:2002 Dual Link 292M Interface for 1920×1080 Picture Raster

ST 424M:2006 3 Gb/s Signal/Data Serial Interface

ST 425M:2006 3 Gb/s Signal/Data Serial Interface-Source Image Format Mapping

SMPTE 2016-1 Format for Active Format Description and Bar Data

SMPTE 2016-3 Vertical Ancillary Data Mapping of Active Format Description and Bar Data

ISO 8601: 2004 Data elements and interchange formats -- Information interchange -- Representation of dates and times

EBU-Tech 3341 Loudness Metering: ‘EBU Mode’ metering to supplement loudness normalisation in accordance with EBU R 128

EBU-Tech 3342 Loudness Range: A measure to supplement loudness normalisation in accordance with EBU R 128

EBU Tech 3304 Multichannel Audio Line-up Tones

SMPTE 2046-1 Specifications for Safe Action and Safe Title Areas for Television

SMPTE ST 2048-1:2011 2048 x 1080 and 4096 x 2160 Digital Cinematography Product Image Formats FS/709

Page 24: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 1

Installation and Operation Manual Introduction

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 24

SMPTE ST 2048-2 2048 × 1080 Digital Cinematography Production Image FS/709 Formatting for Serial Digital Interface

SMPTE ST 2016-1:2009 Format for Active Format Description and Bar Data

This product provides support for IEEE1588:2008 PTP networks, and is being released in advance of ratification of SMPTE standardization work in this area. The product is fully software upgradeable, and will be able to be upgraded to provide full compliance with the SMPTE standard once ratified and published, ensuring interoperability with other compliant equipment.

Safety See the Operator’s Safety Summary (on page 14) for a list of important safety instructions.

Carefully observe all safety alert symbols for dangers, warnings, and cautions. They alert installers and operators of possible dangers or important information contained in this manual.

Keep in mind, though, that warnings alone do not eliminate hazards, nor are they a substitute for safe operating techniques and proper accident prevention measures.

VSG-4TSG Service and Support The VSG-4TSG master timing converters are not designed for field servicing. All hardware upgrades, modifications, or repairs require returning the VSG-4TSG to the Customer Service center.

For service and support, telephone the Harris Broadcast Customer Service Department at 1-888-534-8246. If the problem cannot be resolved over the telephone and the instrument must be shipped to Harris Broadcast for service or repair:

Returning a Product

In the unlikely event that your product fails to operate properly, please contact Customer Service to obtain a Return Authorization (RA) number, and then send the unit back for servicing.

Keep at least one set of original packaging, in the event that you need to return a product for servicing. If the original packaging is not available, you can purchase replacement packaging at a modest cost or supply your own packaging as long as it meets the following criteria:

Withstands the weight of the product

Holds the product rigid within the packaging

Leaves at least two inches of space between the product and the container

Protects the corners of the product

Ship products back to us for servicing prepaid and, if possible, in the original packaging material. If the product is still within the warranty period, we will return the product prepaid after servicing.

Page 25: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 1

Installation and Operation Manual Introduction

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 25

Obtain a Return Authorization (RA) number from the Harris Broadcast Customer Service Department.

Attach a tag to the unit with the following information:

Your company name, address, and telephone number

The name of the contact person at your company

The RA number

The unit serial number

An explanation of the problem

To prevent shipping damage, pack the unit the same way Harris Broadcast had packed it. If possible, use the original packing materials in the original shipping container.

Ship the unit to Harris Broadcast (Address to be provided by Harris Broadcast Customer Service Department) Attn: RA xxxx (where xxxx is the RA number)

Email: [email protected]

Page 26: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 2

Installation and Operation Manual Installation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 26

Installation

Inspecting the Shipment Before installing the VSG-4TSG, inspect the box and the contents. Report any damage to the shipper, and then telephone the Harris Broadcast Customer Service Department (see VSG-4TSG Service and Support (on page 24)).

Note: Refer to the enclosed packing sheet for the latest list of items that are supplied with the unit.

The box contains the following:

One VSG-4TSG

One VSG-4TSG Installation and Operation Manual on CD

Two detachable power cords

Two power supplies in shipping box

Warranty statements

BNC terminator

One hardware kit: AUX I/O HD26 with hood

Save the box and packing material for any future shipping requirements.

Unpacking/Shipping Information This product was carefully inspected, tested, and calibrated before shipment to ensure years of stable and trouble free service.

Unpacking a Product 1. Check equipment for any visible damage that may have occurred during transit.

2. Confirm that you have received all items listed on the packing list.

3. Contact your Harris Broadcast representative if any item on the packing list is missing.

4. Contact the carrier if any item is damaged.

5. Remove all packaging material from the product and its associated components before you install the unit.

Chapter 2

Page 27: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 2

Installation and Operation Manual Installation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 27

Rack Mounting the VSG-4TSG

When selecting the permanent mounting location for the VSG-4TSG, make sure that the flow of air to the ventilation holes on the sides of the chassis is not obstructed.

Rack mounting the VSG-4TSG is illustrated below for the DRT-5 rack mount case. The following table lists the parts required to rack mount the VSG-4TSG into the DRT-5 rack mount case. Contact Customer Service to purchase an optional DRT-5 rack mount kit.

Figure 8: Mounting the VSG-4TSG in a Rack Using the DRT-5 Rack Mount Kit

Although only one VSG-4TSG unit is shown above, two VSG-4TSG units may be mounted into a DRT-5 rack case.

Table 5: Parts for Rack Mounting the VSG-4TSG Using the DRT-5

Key Item Number Qty Description

1 - A/R VSG-4TSG unit

Page 28: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 2

Installation and Operation Manual Installation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 28

Key Item Number Qty Description

DRT-5 Rack Mount Kit

2 P832-0090 1 DRT-5 rack tray (optional)

3 831061 2 Metal extension mount

4 832070 2 Metal extension bracket

5 831030 8 #10-32×¾-in. Black phillips head screws

6 831019 4 Nylon washer, rack mount

7 P831-0026 4 #10-32×¼-in. Phillips head screw

8 831119 4 #8-32 kep nuts

9 831064 4 #8-32×½-in. Phillips head screws

10 831118 8 #10 flat washers

11 831060 4 #10-32 kep nuts

12 831131 4 #6-32×3/8-in. Phillips head screws (CMN mtg)

13 BLK-5 n/a Metal blank panel assembly (separately purchased option, not included in this kit)

14 DRT-ADP-1 n/a Adapter plate to install CMN-41, VSG-401, or LLM1770 series units (separately purchased option, not included in this kit)

1. Install the extension bracket mounts (ITEM 3) to both sides of the chassis (ITEM 2) using four #10-32 screws (ITEM 7) as shown.

2. Install the assembled unit in a rack using #10-32×¾-in Phillips head screws (ITEM 5) and washers (ITEM 6) through the chassis front mounting ears, as shown.

3. Hold the extension bracket (ITEM 4) in place on each side of the chassis, and loosely install #8-32×½-in. Phillips head screws (ITEM 9), #10 flat washers (ITEM 10), and #10-32 kep nuts (ITEM 11) into the holes that align with the slots in the metal extension mount (ITEM 3).

4. Install the remaining #10-32×¾-in. Phillips head screws (ITEM 5), #10 flat washers (ITEM 10), and #10-32 kep nuts s (ITEM 11) through the rack rails and the appropriate slots in the back of the metal extension bracket (ITEM 4), and then tighten them.

5. Tighten the remaining hardware that joins the bracket pairs (ITEM 3 and ITEM 4).

6. Using 6-32 x 3/8-in. Phillips head screws (ITEM 12), secure the VSG-4TSG unit to the back of the DRT-5 rack case.

7. If desired, install the optional BLK-5 cover plate:

Slide the metal cover plate (ITEM 13) into the desired side of the DRT-5 rack.

Using 4 self tapping screws (ITEM 13), secure the cover plate into the DRT-5 rack.

The installation is complete.

Page 29: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 2

Installation and Operation Manual Installation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 29

Connecting the VSG-4TSG The back panel connectors are illustrated in , and the function of each connector is described in the table below.

Figure 9: VSG-4TSG Back Panel Connectors

Table 6: Description of Back Panel Connectors

Key Label Description

1 ETHERNET RJ45, female, 10/100Base-T Ethernet connector (See Ethernet RJ45 Connector (on page 166) for the connections)

2 PWR 11-17 VDC Primary Power connector

3 PWR 11-17 VDC Redundant Power connector

4 AES/Analog Balanced AES and analog audio connector block

5 PGM 1 BNC connector of analog NTSC or PAL selectable test pattern or sync (user selectable)

6 PGM 2 & 3 Switchable AES/Sync outputs

7 SDI 1 and SDI 2 Output BNC connectors for SDI 1 and 2

8 AUX I/O 26 pin, high-density, female, D sub connector for LTC, clock and GPIO (See Optional Breakout Module with Five Foot Cable (on page 30) for connections)

9 LTC 1 LTC 1 Time code output

10 REF IN Reference passive looping BNC for black burst and Tri-level sync

11 SYNC 1 (OUT) Female BNC connector that outputs an NTSC, PAL-B, composite black burst, or Tri-level sync video reference signal

Page 30: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 2

Installation and Operation Manual Installation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 30

Key Label Description

12 PPS IN Female BNC connector that locks the pulse-per-second (PPS) input from a GPS-3904 receiver

13 10MHz IN Female BNC connector that accepts a 10 MHz reference signal typically from a GPS-3904 receiver

14 DARS/WC DARS or word clock output

Optional Breakout Module with Five Foot Cable The optional VSG-4-BRK-1 Breakout module connects to the AUX I/O connector (item #8 in Connecting the VSG-4TSG (on page 29)) either directly or through the 5 ft extension cable in the option kit (cable not shown).

The breakout module further divides the signals available on the DB-26 pin connector into nine function-specific groups and connectors. The breakout board is illustrated below.

Page 31: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 2

Installation and Operation Manual Installation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 31

The VSG-4TSG is provided with a 26 pin solder cup connector allowing access to an extended I/O interface. Please review 26-Pin D-Sub Connector (on page 164) for the detailed pin out of this connector.

Figure 10: VSG-4-BRK-1 Breakout Board

Table 7: Breakout Module Connections

Connector Function

9-pin male serial (D-sub) connector

Provides RS-232. See TIA/EIA-574 (RS-232) 9-Pin Serial Connector (on page 35).

DIP switch Configures termination on the LTC timecode. See DIP Switch (on page 34).

Screw clamp terminals Provide LTC in and out, PPS out, and GPI in and out. See Screw Clamp Terminals (on page 32).

Page 32: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 2

Installation and Operation Manual Installation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 32

Connector Function

26-Pin D-sub connector Connects the breakout module to the back panel of the VSG-4TSG. For pinout information, see Pinouts (on page 164).

3-Pin Weidmuller connector Provides PPS In. See 3-Pin Weidmuller Connector (PPS In) (on page 32).

BNC (upper) Provides LTC2 output.

BNC (lower) Provides LTC input.

3-Pin Weidmuller Connector (PPS In)

The PPS IN provides connectivity to a pulse-per-second (PPS) signal from a GPS-3903 or GPS-3903-2 receiver. For the location of this connector, see Optional Breakout Module with Five Foot Cable (on page 30).

Table 8: PPS In Pin Layouts

Pin Description

1 Ground

2 Unused

3 PPS IN

Screw Clamp Terminals

For the location of these connectors, see Optional Breakout Module with Five Foot Cable (on page 30).

PPS Output

The PPS Output provides a 5V TTL square-wave signal at the 1 Hertz frequency.

Table 9: PPS Out Pin Layouts

Pin Description

1 Ground

2 Unused

3 PPS OUT

Linear Time Code Output (LTC2 OUT)

These connectors are used to output time code. The time code output impedance is settable via a DIP switch. See DIP Switch (on page 34) for more information on adjusting the impedance.

Some devices bridge high-impedance output. Therefore, a large number of clocks may be connected parallel to this output. For the purposes of fault isolation, it is recommended that some form of distribution be used when connecting more than 20 clocks to the system.

Page 33: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 2

Installation and Operation Manual Installation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 33

Table 10: LTC2 OUT Pin Layouts

Pin Description

P LTC Out Positive

N LTC Out Negative

GND Ground

This output, LTC2, is independent of the LTC1 BNC connector on the back panel. Its output matches the breakout board LTC BNC Out.

Linear Time Code Input (LTC INPUT)

These connectors on the screw clamp terminals (described in the table below) are used to input time code. The time code input impedance is settable via a DIP switch. See DIP Switch (on page 34) for more information on adjusting the impedance.

Table 11: TC Input Pin Layouts

Pin Description

P TC In Positive

N TC In Negative

GND Ground

General Purpose Interface (GPI) Inputs and Outputs

The various VSG-4TSG interfaces have different labels for GPI inputs and outputs. The following table describes the labels and pinouts for each GPI.

Table 12: GPI General Purpose Interface Input and Output Labels

Web Server User Interface and Local Control Panel Label

VSG-4-BRK-1 Breakout Label PCB Designation

Pin Description

GPI Output 1 Trigger RET1 * Return 1

GPO1 GPI Output 1 GPO2

GND Ground GND

GPI Output 2 Trigger RET2 * Return 2

GPO2 GPI Output 2 GPO3

GND Ground GND

* The GPI outputs are optically isolated. For the default operation, it is open between the GPI output and RET when there are no alarms and closed between the GPI output and RET when there is an alarm. The user can configure the GPI outputs to be closed between GPI output and RET when there is no alarm and open between the GPI

Page 34: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 2

Installation and Operation Manual Installation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 34

Web Server User Interface and Local Control Panel Label

VSG-4-BRK-1 Breakout Label PCB Designation

Pin Description

output and RET when there is an alarm.

GPI Input 1 Action GPI1 Input 1 GPI0

GPI Input 2 Action GPI2 Input 2 GPI1

GND Ground GND

DIP Switch

For the location of the DIP switch, see Optional Breakout Module with Five Foot Cable (on page 30).

Figure 11: DIP Switch on Breakout Module

DIP Switch positions 1 and 2 on the breakout module configure source impedance on the balanced LTC OUT, as described below.

Table 13: DIP Switch SW1 Positions 1 and 2

Switch Positions Description

Position 1 ON Position 2 ON

Balanced LTC output Low-Z

LTC output Low-Z

Position 1 OFF Position 2 OFF

Balanced LTC output 600

BNCLTC2 output 600

DIP Switch positions 3 and 4 on the breakout module configure termination on the LTC input, as described below.

Table 14: DIP Switch SW1 Positions 3 and 4

Switch Positions Description

Position 3 OFF Balanced LTC input High-Z

Position 3 ON Balanced LTC input 600 terminated*

Position 4 OFF Must be OFF when using Balanced LTC input

Position 4 ON Must be ON when using LTC BNC input

* Note: Setting the differential balanced LTC output to 600Ω impedance would cause a 300Ω impedance at the unbalanced LTC output, which is not recommended for practical use.

Page 35: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 2

Installation and Operation Manual Installation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 35

TIA/EIA-574 (RS-232) 9-Pin Serial Connector

The 9-pin male connector is a standard serial interface connector compliant with TIA/EIA-574. The signaling on this connector is compatible with RS-232 levels. The pin layout when using the RS-232 port as one serial port is shown in 26-Pin D-Sub Connector (on page 164).

Figure 12: RS-232 9-Pin, Male, D-Sub Connector

Table 15: Serial Port (Single)

Pin Description

1 NC

2 Received Data (RD)

3 Transmitted Data (TD)

4 NC

5 Ground

6 NC

7 NC

8 NC

9 NC

System Connections The following sections describe how to connect the VSG-4TSG to other devices, such as GPS receivers.

Connecting the GPS Antenna and Receiver (on page 35)

Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver (on page 37)

Connecting the GPS Antenna and Receiver

This section describes how to mount a GPS antenna, and how to connect the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3904 receiver.

Mounting the GPS Antenna

To mount a GPS antenna outside:

Attach a short length of ¾-in. standard plumbing pipe (not supplied) to an outside surface or wall where it will not be disturbed, as shown below.

Page 36: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 2

Installation and Operation Manual Installation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 36

NOTE: The thread on the end of the pipe must be ¾-in. NPT to properly screw into the bottom of the antenna. It is not necessary to mount the GPS antenna in a sheltered or protected area. However, it should be located where it is unobstructed by surrounding buildings.

1. Thread one end of the 75-ft. (22.86 m) RG-59 cable through the pipe.

2. Attach the female F-type or TNC connector on the RG-59 cable to the male connection under the antenna dome.

3. Connect the remainder of the RG-59 cable to the antenna lightning suppressor (impulse suppressor) included in the GPS receiver / antenna kit.

4. Ground the attached suppressor according to the manufacturer’s instructions and the local electrical codes.

5. Connect the other side of the lightning suppressor to an RG-59 cable and thread the cable through an exterior wall and into the building.

NOTE: To ensure the safety of personnel and the protection of equipment from lightning strikes, it is recommended that the approved ground wire is attached to the RG-59 cable. Follow the provisions of the local electrical code.

Figure 13: Typical Outdoor Installation of a GPS Antenna

Page 37: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 2

Installation and Operation Manual Installation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 37

Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver

Follow these steps to connect the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 receiver:

Using a standard BNC cable, connect the 1 PPS OUTPUT BNC connector on the GPS 3904 receiver to the PPS BNC connector on theVSG-4TSG, as shown below.

1. Using a standard BNC cable, connect the 10MHz OUTPUT BNC connector on the GPS 3904 receiver to the 10 MHZ connector on the VSG-4TSG

2. Connect the breakout module to the 26-pin connector on the back of the VSG-4TSG.

3. Attach the 9-pin male connector on the RS-232 serial cable to the 9-pin female RS-232 connector on the back of the GPS 3904 receiver.

4. Attach the 9-pin female connector on the RS-232 serial cable to the 9-pin male RS-232 connector on the VSG-4TSG breakout module.

Figure 14: VSG-4TSG to GPS 3904 Receiver Connections

For information on configuring the VSG-4TSG for GPS operation, see GPS Config.

Page 38: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 2

Installation and Operation Manual Installation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 38

Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3903 Receiver

NOTE: To connect theVSG-4TSG system to a GPS 3903 receiver, use a CAB-CSD-GPS3901 cable.

Follow these steps to connect the VSG-4TSG to the GPS 3903 receiver. The figure below illustrates the required connections.

Ensure the GPS 3903 antenna is mounted outside the building and connected to the receiver.

1. Connect the breakout module to the 26-pin connector on the back of the VSG-4TSG.

2. If the system did not come with a CAB-CSD-GPS3901 cable, create a custom cable to connect the VSG-4TCG to the GPS 3903 receiver. Attach the 9 pin male RS-232 connector to PORT 2 on the GPS 3903 receiver.

3. Attach the 9-pin female RS-232 of the cable to the 9-pin male RS-232 connector on the breakout board, as shown below.

4. Attach the cable's Weidmuller 3-pin female connector to the 3-pin male connector labeled PSS IN on the breakout board.

When making this connection, ensure that the screw heads on the Weidmuller 3-pin female connector are facing up.

Page 39: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 2

Installation and Operation Manual Installation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 39

5. Configure the device as GPS3903 using the web or front panel interface (Sources > Configuration > GPS Config).

Figure 15: VSG-4TSG to GPS 3903 Receiver Connections

Connecting the GPS Antenna to the Receiver

After the antenna has been installed and connected, the other end of the RG-59 cable must be connected to the 8 in. (20 cm) Type-F or TNC adapter cable. The other end of the adapter cable is then plugged into the ANT port of the GPS 3904 receiver.

Ethernet Setup The Ethernet default settings for the VSG-4TSG are as follows: IP: 192.168.0.100 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 Gateway: 0.0.0.0

Page 40: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 2

Installation and Operation Manual Installation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 40

1. Prior to performing the VSG-4TSG network configuration, obtain TCP/IP addresses from the system administrator or the Internet service provider (ISP). These addresses are a static IP address (unless using Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol [DHCP]), a subnet mask, and an optional gateway IP.

Be sure to record all addresses in the spaces provided below. The gateway address is not needed unless the VSG-4TSG is routed to an outside network.

VSG-4TSG interface static IP address

VSG-4TSG interface subnet mask

Gateway IP address

2. Identify a host PC to configure and test the VSG-4TSG.

3. Choose a dedicated PC connection or network connection method:

For a dedicated PC connection, connect the host PC with a network card to the "ENET" connector on the back panel of the VSG-4TSG, using a CAT5 network cable (not included). See .

Figure 16: VSG-4TSG Dedicated PC Connection

For a network connection, connect the network hub to the back panel of the VSG-4TSG using a CAT5 network cable (not included). See .

Figure 17: VSG-4TSG Network PC Connection

Page 41: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 2

Installation and Operation Manual Installation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 41

4. Set up an Ethernet configuration for the VSG-4TSG as follows:

a. Press the SETUP button on the VSG-4TSG front panel.

b. Press the Up/Down arrow button to scroll to the Unit Configuration Setup menu, and then press the ENT button to enter the submenu.

c. Press the Up/Down arrow button until the IP selection option is shown.

d. Press the ENT button or Left/Right arrow button to enter the Ethernet Config selection option.

e. Select DHCP Control, and then press the ENT button, or use the right arrow to scroll to the next selection. (Use the Up/Down arrows to change the selection.)

f. Once enabled, the obtained DHCP address can be viewed through IP IP Address

g. If using DHCP:

Press the Left/Right arrow button to select DHCP.

Press the Up/Down arrow button to toggle the state to ON.

Press the ENT button.

The IP Address is retrieved from the DHCP server and placed under the appropriate submenu.

h. If not using DHCP:

Press the Left/Right arrow button to select IP ADDRESS.

Press the Up/Down arrow button to change the value selected, and then press the Left/Right arrow button to select the next value.

Repeat for the remainder of the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway. To avoid conflicts, the static IP address, subnet mask, and gateway should be obtained from the system administrator.

Press the ENT button to accept the entered values.

i. Press the EXIT button to exit to the IP menu, and then press the last parameter, Apply IP.

Page 42: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 3

Installation and Operation Manual Theory of Operation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 42

Theory of Operation Time/Date and Time Base information received from an active source is translated into an internal time keeping engine (ITKE). Synchronization of multiple outputs is then achieved by converting data contained within the internal time keeping engine into various customizable output time formats. illustrates a simplified system flow.

Figure 18: VSG-4TSG Time Generator Inputs and Outputs Flow

Time Base Definitions It is important to understand the relationship of the different types of time bases. These concepts will aid in the successful operation of the unit.

TAI Time—International Atomic Time (TAI, from the French name Temps Atomique International) is a high-precision atomic coordinate time standard based on the notional passage of proper time on Earth's geoid. TAI was synchronized with Universal Time at the beginning of 1958. It is a Non leap second compensated "continuous" time.

UTC Time—Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), formerly known as Greenwich Mean Time (GMT), is the sum of TAI time minus an integer number of leap seconds. A leap second is a positive or negat ive one-second adjustment to the UTC designed so that UTC remains close to mean solar time.The International Earth Rotation and Reference Systems Service (IERS) periodically announces the insertion of a leap second approximately every six months. Historical leap second adjustments can be obtained from the following url: http://maia.usno.navy.mil/ser7/tai-utc.dat.

Chapter 3

Page 43: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 3

Installation and Operation Manual Theory of Operation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 43

GPS Time—Global Positioning System time, is the atomic time scale implemented by the atomic clocks in the GPS ground control stations and the GPS satellites themselves. GPS time was zeroed with UTC at 0h 6-Jan-1980. It is not perturbed by leap seconds.

Local Time—Local time correlates to the time and date relative to the physical unit.

VSG-4TSG Time Inputs The VSG-4TSG accepts two independent types of inputs: one that provides time and date information and another that provides time base information.

The device can obtain time and date information from any of these input sources:

GPS

NTP

PTP

LTC

VITC

LOCAL Time

The device obtains time base synchronization through any of these time base input sources:

10 MHz

Video

PTP

Freerun

Some of the aforementioned combinations produce erroneous results, therefore menu restrictions will be applied based upon invalid combinations. Supported combinations of time/date and time base sources are listed below.

Table 16: Supported Combinations of Time/Date and Time Base Source

Source

Time Date Time Base Configuration Notes

GPS 10 MHz GPS synchronous to the 10 MHz source

GPS Video GPS synchronous to the REF Video

GPS Freerun

NTP 10 MHz NTP synchronous to the 10 MHz source

NTP Video NTP synchronous to the REF Video

NTP Freerun

PTP PTP Connectivity to a PTP Master device

LTC 10 MHz LTC synchronous to the 10MHz source

Page 44: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 3

Installation and Operation Manual Theory of Operation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 44

Source

Time Date Time Base Configuration Notes

LTC Video LTC synchronous to the REF Video

LTC Freerun

VITC Video VITC matches REF format

LOCAL Time 10 MHz

LOCAL Time Video

LOCAL Time PTP Connectivity to a PTP Master device

LOCAL Time Freerun

Additionally, each reference source can be configured with an offset parameter. This offset compensates for any time zone differences between the current input and current local time.

This table describes the format of the incoming source with offset ranges.

Table 17: Offset Ranges for Incoming Sources

Time / Date Source

Possible Formats Offset Available

GPS UTC,GPS +/- HH:MM:SS*

NTP UTC +/- HH:MM:SS*

PTP UTC +/- HH:MM:SS*

LTC UTC plus (Date, Timezone, DST) +/- HH:MM:SS*

VITC UTC plus (Date, Timezone, DST) +/- HH:MM:SS*

LOCAL Time UTC plus (Timezone, DST) --

*The maximum configurable offset is +/- 23:59:59

User Configurable Local Time If there are no valid sources connected to the device, the VSG-4TSG will internally generate a time/date and time base.

This is the default mode of operation for the product. If defaulted or for first time use; the initial time and date will be January 1st 1970 GMT.

Through menu selections, provisions for setting the local time of the unit are provided. With no input source, local time follows the following formula:

Local Time = Time/Date Menu Selections + Local Time Zone Time + Local

DST Adjustment

If a valid external source is in use by the system, then local time becomes:

Page 45: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 3

Installation and Operation Manual Theory of Operation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 45

Local Time = Adjusted External Source Time/Date + Local Time Zone Time

+ Local DST Adjustment

Source Detection and Failover Periodic communications will occur between the VSG-4TSG and all potential source devices. The rate at which this exchange occurs, will vary based upon the capabilities of the individual device. Individual device status can be viewed at anytime through front panel button sequences. If the device is assigned as either the primary or secondary source, then it's data will propagate through the system as determined through the configuration menus. A failover condition from the locked source will occur based upon the following rules:

Table 18: Failover conditions From Locked Sources

Failover Sense System Reaction Notes

Time Base Loss Failover to backup source after 1 second of signal interruption

Potential output glitch will occur

Time or Date Loss Failover @ scheduled source jam time

If the time, date, or time base reference source is missing from the primary input source, the VSG-4TSG switches to the secondary input source. If the secondary source also fails, the VSG-4TSG will failover to the Freerun source.

Figure 19: Failover Sequence of Events

Note: Any change in the VSG-4TSG time may cause a disruption in the output time.

Failover Return When reference is recovered from the failed source, the VSG-4TSG automatically switches back to the highest available input source. This feature can be disabled through the menu system in which case the user must manually force the switch.

Page 46: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 3

Installation and Operation Manual Theory of Operation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 46

Source-To-Internal Time Keeping Engine (ITKE) Synchronization details the conditions when the ITKE is updated:

Table 19: Conditions when Source-To-Internal Time Keeping is Updated

Source Jam Conditions Notes Outputs Affected

Power-up On power up, the system is synchronized

Yes

Now User forces synchronization Depends on output menu*

Schedule

Daily Force update once a day Depends on output menu*

Weekly Force update once a week Depends on output menu*

Monthly Force update once a month Depends on output menu*

User changes local time

Internal time in use as the source and then the user changes data

Yes

Input Failover Reaction is based upon the Jam Schedule

Per schedule

* A menu selection is provided to Jam the outputs after a source Jam occurs this is the default configuration of the unit.

Internal Time Keeping The VSG-4TSG maintains International Atomic Time (TAI) as the principal time base. Since input time sources can have different time bases, including local time and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), the VSG-4TSG must convert the incoming time information into TAI time.

On loss of external time base the unit will internally generate the time base.

VSG-4TSG Time Outputs Once the internal time base has been established, the VSG-4TSG converts this time information to a corresponding UTC or local time and sends it to the outputs. These outputs include the following:

PTP Master

NTP Server

Page 47: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 3

Installation and Operation Manual Theory of Operation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 47

Two Linear Time Code (LTC) outputs

Black burst video outputs that can be configured to include Vertical Interval Time Code (VITC)

SDI output that can be configured to include Digital Vertical Interval Time Code (DVITC) or Ancillary Time Code (ATC)

Composite output that can be configured to include Vertical Interval Time Code (VITC)

Separate times are maintained for each output. This time is periodically synchronized with the ITKE. Variations between the ITKE time and the output times are managed this way to limit disruptions in continuous LTC outputs or black burst video output signals.

details the conditions when the outputs are updated:

Table 20: Conditions when Outputs are Updated

Output(s) Jam Conditions Notes

Power-up On power up, the system is synchronized

Now or Follow Source Jam User forces output synchronization

Schedule

Daily Force update once a day

Weekly Force update once a week

Monthly Force update once a month

Menu Modifications

Time Change (DST, Offsets) Applied at based upon Jam Schedule

Video Format (DF, Frame Rate) Immediately

Video Delays (Line, Pixel/Sub Pixel, Frame) Immediately

Output Rules

Timebase and timedate management is independent. Changing one will not cause an output change to the other. Jam will be timedate only.

1. Output will experience a disruption when timebase changes are made. This includes:

Source Offsets

Output Timing Offsets

Timebase changes

Output Format Change

describes the format of the outputs with offset ranges.

Page 48: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 3

Installation and Operation Manual Theory of Operation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 48

Table 21: Outputs with Associated Offset Ranges

Time / Date Source Possible Formats Offset Available

Local Time ITKE plus (Timezone, DST) --

NTP ITKE converted to UTC (GMT) --

PTP ITKE converted to UTC (GMT) --

LTC ITKE plus (Date, Timezone, DST) +/- HH:MM:SS*

VITC ITKE plus (Date, Timezone, DST) +/- HH:MM:SS*

*The maximum configurable offset is +/- 23:59:59.

Local Time Display

The following formula is used in generating local time:

Local Time = ITKE + ITKE Global Offset + Local Time Zone Time + Local

DST Adjustment

Configuring NTP Output Time

The following formula is used to calculate the output time:

NTP Output time = ITKE + ITKE Global Offset - Converted to UTC (GMT)

Configuring PTP Output Time

The following formula is used to calculate the output time:

PTP Output time = ITKE + ITKE Global Offset - Converted to UTC (GMT)

Configuring LTC Output Time

The following formula is used to calculate the output time:

LTC Output time = ITKE + ITKE Global Offset + LTC Time Zone + LTC

Output Offset + LTC DST Adjustment

Menu selections exist to control the content of the LTC packet. See Table and Table .

Configuring VITC Output Time

The following formula is used to calculate the output time:

VITC Output time = ITKE + ITKE Global Offset + VITC Time Zone + VITC

Output Offset + VITC DST Adjustment

Menu selections exist to control the content of the VITC packet. See Table .

Page 49: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 3

Installation and Operation Manual Theory of Operation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 49

Configuring DVITC Output Time

The following formula is used to calculate the output time:

DVITC Output time = ITKE + ITKE Global Offset + DVITC Time Zone +

DVITC Output Offset + DVITC DST Adjustment

Menu selections exist to control the content of the DVITC packet. See Table .

Configuring ATC Output Time

The following formula is used to calculate the output time:

ATC Output time = ITKE + ITKE Global Offset + ATC Time Zone + ATC

Output Offset + ATC DST Adjustment

Menu selections exist to control the content of the ATC packet. See Table .

Page 50: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 4

Installation and Operation Manual Front Panel Operation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 50

Front Panel Operation Pressing and holding certain buttons will activate menus for additional functionality. When a button is pressed that cannot be used with a selected function, the message FUNCTION NOT ALLOWED briefly appears over the center of the display.

When a "Loading Pattern" or "Loading Audio" message box displays, front panel operation is not allowed until the loading is completed.

Directly Selecting Specific Function(s) Press the appropriate function button.

Accessing a Function-Specific Setup Menu

Press and hold the function button; or press the SETUP button, and then use the navigation buttons to scroll through the menu selections.

For more information on the global Setup menu, see Setup Menu Functions (see "Parameters and Functions" on page 91).

Leaving the Setup Menu

Press the SETUP or EXIT button.

Chapter 4

Page 51: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 4

Installation and Operation Manual Front Panel Operation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 51

Panel Controls The front panel controls are illustrated below.

Figure 20: VSG-4TSG Front Panel Controls

Most buttons and text are in a low-tally (low illumination) state; under certain conditions, however, some buttons and text reach a high-tally (high illumination) state, as described below . The high and low tally illumination levels can be set in the High Tally and Low Tally selection options of the Unit Configuration Front Panel setup menu selection option.

Multiple buttons may be high tally at the same time. The last control selected is the active control.

VSG-4TSG Front Panel Controls

Key Label Description

1 LOCK Press and hold to lock or unlock the front panel. High tally indicates the panel is locked.

An Auto Lock feature to lock the panel after 30 seconds of front panel inactivity can be enabled through the menu system.

2 - Display window

3 SETUP Press and release to access Setup mode.

Press and release again to exit the displayed Setup menu.

4 EXT Press and release to toggle between internal freerun (low tally) and the currently selected timebase of the active source (high tally).

5 BARS2 Press and release to activate the currently selected bar signal on the currently selected output.

Press and hold to select current bar signal (parameter Color Bars).

Page 52: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 4

Installation and Operation Manual Front Panel Operation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 52

Key Label Description

6 AUD2 , 3 Press and release to activate the audio on the currently selected output.

Press and hold to enter the audio control menu.

7 PTRN2 Press and release to activate the currently selected graphic signal on the currently selected output.

Press and hold to select the current graphic signal (parameter Graphics).

8 ID2,3 Press and release to activate the OSD Source ID on the currently selected output.

Press and hold to enter the OSD Source ID control menu.

9 MOVE2, 3 Press and release to set activation state for pattern motion on the currently selected output.

Press and hold to enter the Movement control menu.

10 - USB drive connector, used to import bitmap or audio wave files.

11 PRIMARY

(Green)

Indicates that the primary time source is locked and used as the unit's time source.

12 SECONDARY

(Green)

Indicates that the secondary time source is locked and used as the unit's time source.

13 LOCK

(green)

Indicates that the unit is able to lock to the selected time source.

14 ERROR (Red)

When lit, indicates that an error (alarm) has been detected.

15 EXIT Exit selection button; press and release to leave menu function selections

16 Navigation Use to navigate menus and select selections options:

ENT: Enter the submenu. Select the option.

Up: Move up in a menu or submenu tree.

Down: Move down in a menu or submenu tree.

Left: Move left, or exit a submenu.

Right: Move right, or enter a submenu.

17 OUT Press and release to enter the Output Status menu, used to check the status of all the outputs.

Press and hold to enter the Output control menu, used to configure all the outputs.

18 PRI Press and release to view which input source is currently selected for primary source, and the detail information associated with this selected source.

Press and hold to select the primary source (parameter Primary Source Select).

19 PRST Press and release to enter the presets control menu.

Page 53: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 4

Installation and Operation Manual Front Panel Operation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 53

Key Label Description

20 SEC Press and release to view which input source is currently selected for secondary source, and the detail information associated with this selected source.

Press and hold to select the secondary source (parameter Secondary Source Select).

21 ENET Press and release to display the Ethernet network status.

Press and hold to enter the menu for the unit's IP settings.

22 SRC Press and release to enter the Input Status menu, used to check the status of all the inputs.

Press and hold to enter the Source Select menu.

1 All the quick buttons (4-9 and 17-22) are operable only when the display window stays at the Default Display screen.

2 The controlled destination (SDI 1, SDI 2, SDI 1+2 or PGM 1) is determined by the front panel output focus. Use the up/down navigation keys to change the destination. For details, please refer to the section "Default Display".

3 For SDI outputs only.

Display Window

The default status displays show when you exit to the top level. The default status display can be selected from one of the following:

Generator Status (see "Generator Display" on page 53)

Time Status (see "Time Display" on page 54)

Generator and Time Status Display (see "Generator and Time Display" on page 55)

To select the default status display, use the Default Status Display/Default Display Type menu. The Time Status and the Generator and Time Status displays have an additional level of configuration that determines the displayed time's source. To select a time source, use the Default Status Display/Default Time Source menu.

Page 54: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 4

Installation and Operation Manual Front Panel Operation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 54

Generator Display

This display can be selected as the default display of the unit, representing the generated test signal of the VSG-4TSG.

SDI 1: 75% Color Bars1080i/59.94 Hz

G1: G2: G3: G4:

Error Status: Loss of REF

23

4

1

5

Figure 21: Generator Status Display

Generator Status Display Information Descriptions

Key Description

1 SDI or PGM 1 front panel output focus. This indicates which output certain front panel buttons (BARS, PTRN, AUD, MOVE, and ID) will affect.

The SDI output number (1, 2, 1+2, or PGM 1) is selected by using the up/down navigation keys. An output number of 1+2 indicates that SDI outputs 1 and 2 are set to dual-link or dual-stream. SDI 2 is not selectable if SDI 2 is following SDI 1.

2 The current output test pattern

3 The output video format and frame rate

4 Audio Groups enabled:

indicates the audio group is enabled

indicates that the audio group is disabled

5 Displays the most recent error. This line is blank if no errors are detected

Time Display

This can be selected as the default display of the unit; representing time of the VSG-4TSG.

The time that is being displayed (Input or Output) is menu configurable.

Locked

2012-07-20 Local Time 09:00:001

2

4

SDI 1 5

3

Figure 22: Main Status Display

Page 55: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 4

Installation and Operation Manual Front Panel Operation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 55

Main Status Display Information Descriptions

Key Description

1 Menu selectable time formatted as follows:

hh:mm:ss

where:

hh is the number of complete hours that have passed since midnight

mm is the number of complete minutes since the start of the hour

ss is the number of complete seconds since the start of the minute

2 The associated date selection represented as YYYY-MM-DD where:

YYYY is the year

MM is the month

DD is the day of the week

3 Displays the most recent error. This line is blank if no errors are detected

4 A text string indicating which output or source time is being displayed

5 SDI or PGM 1 front panel output focus. This indicates which output certain front panel buttons (BARS, PTRN, AUD, MOVE, and ID) will affect.

The SDI output number (1, 2, 1+2, or PGM 1) is selected by using the up/down navigation keys. An output number of 1+2 indicates that SDI outputs 1 and 2 are set to dual-link or dual-stream. SDI 2 is not selectable if SDI 2 is following SDI 1.

Generator and Time Display

This can be selected as the default display of the unit; representing a combination of the generated test signal and time of the VSG-4TSG.

The time that is being displayed (Input or Output) is menu configurable.

SDI 1: 75% Color Bars09:00:001 07-23-12 4

2 3

5

Figure 23: Generator and Time Status Display

Page 56: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 4

Installation and Operation Manual Front Panel Operation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 56

Generator and Time Status Display Information Descriptions

Key Description

1 Menu selectable time formatted as follows:

hh:mm:ss

where:

hh is the number of complete hours that have passed since midnight

mm is the number of complete minutes since the start of the hour

ss is the number of complete seconds since the start of the minute

2 SDI or PGM 1 front panel output focus. This indicates which output certain front panel buttons (BARS, PTRN, AUD, MOVE, and ID) will affect.

The SDI output number (1, 2, 1+2, or PGM 1) is selected by using the up/down navigation keys. An output number of 1+2 indicates that SDI outputs 1 and 2 are set to dual-link or dual-stream. SDI 2 is not selectable if SDI 2 is following SDI 1.

3 Generator test signal

4 The associated date selection represented as YYYY-MM-DD where:

YYYY is the year

MM is the month

DD is the day of the month

5 Displays the most recent error. This line is blank if no errors are detected

Setup Display To navigate the Setup menu, Use the SETUP, UP, DOWN, LEFT, RIGHT, ENT, and EXIT buttons. The available button selection will be indicated by a high tally navigation button.

Figure 24: Setup Display Screen

Page 57: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 4

Installation and Operation Manual Front Panel Operation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 57

Setup Menu Details

Key Description

1 Up/Down directional marker (controlled by the Up/Down navigation buttons)

2 Upper menu name

3 Submenu level number

4 Submenu number

5 Number of submenus under current menu item

6 Submenu name

7 Left/Right directional marker (controlled by the Left/ Right navigation buttons)

The setup navigation controls are described below. See Panel Controls (on page 51) for the location of these buttons.

The menu structure on the front panel is mostly closed to the web UI with some exceptions. This table shows the links between the web page and front panel. See Parameters and Functions (on page 91) for details.

Web Page Front Panel

Parameter Control --

-> Sources Setup -> Sources

-> Outputs Setup -> Outputs

-> Other -> GPI Setup -> Other

-> Unit Configuration Setup -> Unit Configuration

-> Status --

-> Time Source Status --

-> Active Time Source LED (PRIMARY/SECONDARY)

-> Primary Press and release the button "PRI".

-> Secondary Press and release the button "SEC".

-> Input Status Press and release the button "SRC".

-> Output Status Press and release the button "OUT". ①

-> Leap Second Not supported. ②

Upgrade Firmware Not supported.

Bitmap Management Setup -> Other-> Bitmap Management ③

Wave Management Setup -> Other -> Wave Management ③

Device Information Setup -> Device Info

User Account Not supported.

Faults Setup -> Other -> Faults

Page 58: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 4

Installation and Operation Manual Front Panel Operation

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 58

Web Page Front Panel

Presets Setup -> Other -> Presets ④

Notes: ① The status of ENET could be accessed by the quick button "ENET". ② Not support Leap Second feature (neither load nor status). ③ Not support loading file via PC. ④ Not support renaming presets.

Page 59: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 5

Installation and Operation Manual Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 59

Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

System Requirements The network and computer used to monitor and control VSG-4TSG must meet or exceed the following hardware and software requirements:

A VSG-4TSG installed and connected to the LAN

A PC connected to a LAN with:

Windows 7, Windows Vista, or Windows XP Service Pack 2 operating system

Intel® Pentium® III 450MHz or faster processor (or equivalent)

A minimum of 128MB of RAM

Silverlight version 5.0 (You can install the plug-in from the unit. See Installing Silverlight (on page 60).)

A standard crossover or straight-through100 Mbps 100Base-T RJ-45 Ethernet cable to connect to a PC (the frame auto-detects the cable type)

Logging in to the VSG-4TSG Interface To open a browser connection to a VSG-4TSG, follow these steps:

1. In your browser, enter the IP address of the VSG-4TSG and click Enter to connect.

If the VSG-4TSG is off or in a failed state (i.e., disconnected), then you will see a “browser cannot display the page” or “browser could not connect” message.

Note: If you are using Windows 7 operating system, a security dialog box may appear. Click Ok to confirm that you want to go to the page. If you click No on this dialog box, you will instead see a “Page cannot be displayed” message.

If the computer you are attempting to log in from does not have Silverlight, you can install the plug-in from the controller. See Installing Silverlight (on page 60).

2. Enter a defined user name and password.

Default user name: Administrator

Default password: none (leave the field blank)

For more information on configuring user IDs and passwords, see User Account (on page 77).

3. Click Login.

The Control Interface appears.

The number of PCs connected to the unit has an impact on the frame’s ability to present data in a timely fashion. If a large number of users are logged into the frame, response time may become slower. Up to ten separate PCs are recommended to be connected to the unit at any one time.

Chapter 5

Page 60: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 5

Installation and Operation Manual Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 60

Installing Silverlight If the computer you are attempting to log in from does not have Silverlight, when you enter the IP address of the VSG-4TSG, the following message will appear:

Figure 25: Silverlight Installer Screen

Follow the instructions that appear on the screen. An internet connection is not required for the PC to complete the install.

Exiting the VSG-4TSG Interface To log off the VSG-4TSG interface, do one of the following:

Close your browser.

Navigate to a different page in your browser.

Click Logout in the top right corner of the control panel.

Page 61: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 5

Installation and Operation Manual Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 61

Navigating the VSG-4TSG Interface The VSG-4TSG Home page shows the device status on images of the front and back panel, and basic descriptive information in the Summary Panel about the VSG-4TSG at the right, as described in Summary Panel (on page 63).

Figure 26: VSG-4TSG Home Page

The LED indicators on the front panel (Primary, Secondary, Lock, and Error) are dynamic, indicating the same status on the physical device panel.

The back panel ports can be surrounded by a ring of yellow (minor alarm) or red (major alarm) in the case of an alarm related to that port being asserted.

Arrows near the bottom right of the Home page open or close the Active Faults window. See Active Faults Panel for more information.

Active Faults Panel

The Active Faults panel appears at the bottom of the Home screen. It displays faults as they are received by the module. As such, it is a dynamic view, and may change rapidly as events are triggered and cleared.

When the Active Faults list is collapsed, it displays a narrow bar at the bottom of the interface. The bar displays the color of the worst active fault of the module.

Page 62: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 5

Installation and Operation Manual Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 62

To open the Active Faults list, click the up arrow in the bottom right of the Home page.

Figure 27: Active Faults Panel open on VSG-4TSG Home Page

If there are more faults than can appear on the page, a scroll bar appears at the right of the list so you can view items that are not currently visible.

You can sort the Active Faults List by column headers.

Ack: Whether the fault has been acknowledged

Time Issued: The point at which the fault was triggered (some conditions must be in an activated state for a period of time before the Fault is triggered)

Fault Name: The name of the fault, as defined by the triggering module

Data: If necessary, more information about the fault may be presented here; this field can be empty

Error Level: Indicates the severity of the fault as Major (6-10) or Minor (1-5)

Count: Number of times this fault has been triggered (you can usually clear this count by resetting the module)

Parameter Configure: Provides a hyperlink to a specific control associated with correcting the fault.

Page 63: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 5

Installation and Operation Manual Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 63

Summary Panel

The Summary Panel on the right side of the VSG-4TSG Home page is for informational purposes, and provides alarm and status overview information for the VSG-4TSG as a whole at a glance.

Figure 28: VSG-4TSG Summary Panel

Network Status

IP: Displays the IP address of the module (should match the URL bar in your web browser).

Subnet Mask: Defines the number range that can connect to the module over Ethernet.

Gateway: Defines the server.

For information on configuring the network settings, see Parameter Control (on page 65).

Device Summary Lists the total number of alarms currently existing for the module.

Active faults: The total number of faults currently active.

Major faults: The number of active faults with severity 6-10.

Minor faults: The number of active faults with severity 1-5.

Page 64: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 5

Installation and Operation Manual Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 64

Power Supply Status The indicator for each installed power supply in the module has the following meanings:

Green: Power supply is present and functioning

Grey: Power supply is not present

Device Info lists information for the module.

Serial No: This is the module’s unique ID

Software Rev: Indicates the revision of the firmware

Audio File Rev: Lists the revision number of the audio file

User Interface Version: Indicates the version number of the external control software

Using the Configuration Tools Administrators can use the Configuration tools to configure and control the VSG-4TSG on the network, control parameters, and perform other administrative tasks such as managing user accounts, device information, and firmware.

Figure 29: Main Configuration Screen

In the left of this screen, under System Prese ts, you can create, modify and apply presets. For complete information about presets, see Using Presets (on page 83).

To the right, you can choose various control options, described in the following topics.

Parameter Control (on page 65)

Upgrade Firmware (on page 70)

Bitmap Management (on page 72)

Page 65: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 5

Installation and Operation Manual Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 65

Wave Management (on page 74)

Device Information (on page 75)

User Account (on page 77)

Parameter Control

The View menu has three ways to browse the parameters for a module:

Block Diagram—Click on a square on the block diagram to view controls within that functional region.

Figure 30: Block Diagram With A Block Selected

Page 66: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 5

Installation and Operation Manual Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 66

All—Displays the entire parameter list in a tree view. To view a modular group of parameters, click an item.

Figure 31: Parameter All View with a Group Selected

Favorites—Displays selected parameters for the module. Only an administrator user or system user can designate favorites. An operator user can only control favorites. See Using Favorites on page 93.

Figure 32: Favorites View With Some Favorites Designated

Page 67: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 5

Installation and Operation Manual Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 67

The Faults tab displays control settings for all faults on the VSG-4TSG.

To return to the main Configuration screen, click the left-pointing arrow beside Control Panel.

Using Parameters

Parameters come in various types:

Read-only parameters display feedback and information

List parameters include a series of options

Range parameters provide a slider from a maximum to a minimum option

String parameters have a field where you can enter text or numbers

Viewing Read-Only Parameters

Read-only parameters feed back the current state of a specific parameter.

Figure 33: Read-only parameter

Changing a List Parameter

List parameters contain a series of possible values for a specific parameter. Enumeration and string-list parameter changes are always delayed. List parameters are identifiable by the arrow in the right corner of the button. When you roll the mouse over a list parameter, the button highlights.

The button for a list parameter shows the current selection for that parameter.

Figure 34: List Parameter

Figure 35: List Parameter with its List Open

To adjust a list parameter, click the list. The current parameter value is replicated in the list and in the parameter bar. Use the mouse or the arrow keys on the keyboard to select an item in the list.

Page 68: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 5

Installation and Operation Manual Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 68

Changing a Range Parameter

A range parameter uses up/down arrows to change the number. The current value is shown at the left of the arrows.

Figure 36: Example of a Numeric Parameter

To change the parameter’s value, do one of the following:

Click Up or Down in the spin control.

Use the mouse or tab button to select the parameter, and then press the left and right arrow keys on the keyboard to decrease or increase the parameter value.

Use the mouse or tab button to select the parameter, and then type a number on the keyboard.

As you adjust a numeric parameter, the value is immediately set on the product.

Changing a String Parameter

String parameters are items that can be renamed using text characters. String parameter changes do not take effect until the entire string has been modified. Use a keyboard, or copy and paste, to enter a value.

Figure 37: Example of a String Parameter

To modify string parameters, follow these steps:

1. Use the mouse or tab button to select the parameter you want to modify.

2. To modify the string, do one of the following:

Type new data using your computer keyboard.

OR

Copy and paste data from another program or another portion of the screen. Copy and paste is particularly useful when adding nonintuitive data such as license keys.

Using Favorites

Favorites for a module are usually the most commonly used parameters. Only an administrator or system user can select favorites. An operator user can only modify parameters that are designated as favorites. All other parameters in the other views are view-only for operator users.

When viewing parameters in the Block or All mode, each parameter has a small star in the top right corner. This indicates the Favorites state for that parameter.

Page 69: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 5

Installation and Operation Manual Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 69

Table 22: Parameter Favorites States

Color State

Grey Not a favorite

Yellow Favorite

Selecting Favorites

Follow these steps to select or update the favorites list for a device:

1. In the VSG-4TSG application, select the Configuration tab.

2. Select the All view or the Block view.

3. Browse the parameters.

To designate a parameter as a favorite, click the grey favorite indicator in the top right corner of the parameter control.

To remove the favorite designation from a parameter, click the yellow favorite indicator in the top right corner of the parameter control.

Favorites you have designated are saved in local memory until you save them. You can select Favorites view to view the selected favorite parameters for that device. The marked favorites are saved locally. However, users on other PCs will not be able to see the updated favorites list, and if you browse away from the VSG-4TSG without saving favorites, your changes will be lost.

4. When you are satisfied with the designated favorites, click Save Favorites.

Saved favorite parameters are stored, and can be used by any operator on the system.

Keep in mind that if administrators on different PCs are adjusting the favorites list, their changes will overwrite each other’s. You will not see updated favorites from another PC until you refresh.

Viewing Favorites

When you select the Favorites tab, all parameters marked as favorites appear on the screen.

Page 70: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 5

Installation and Operation Manual Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 70

Upgrade Firmware

The Upgrade Manager has four functions, described in the following sections:

To return to the main Configuration screen, click the left-pointing arrow beside Control Panel.

Upgrading Software

To upgrade the software on VSG-4TSG, follow these steps:

1. On the Configuration pane, select Upgrade Firmware.

2. Click Browse and choose the appropriate upgrade package file.

3. Click Software Upgrade.

An upgrading message appears.

After the file is transferred, a Loss of Connection message displays on the screen while the upgrade continues. To monitor the status of the upgrade, you can check the status on the VSG-4TSG front panel.

VSG-4TSG reboots itself as the upgrade continues. If the upgrade is substantial, this can take a while. The LEDs on the front panel flash and the LCD displays "Imagine Communications".

When the upgrade is complete, normal parameter menus appear on the LCD.

4. To confirm the upgrade, check the software version under Device Info.

See Device Information (on page 75).

Page 71: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 5

Installation and Operation Manual Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 71

When upgrading a VSG-4TSG from the old Web-UI style (firmware versions r175, r180, etc.) to the new UI style (software version 2.0 or higher), all original settings are lost and the old preset file is not compatible. You must manually reconfigure the module after upgrading.

Upgrading Audio Files

The Audio file is necessary for playing Dolby signals or loudness sequence audio test patterns. It is an individual upgrade file and could be downloaded from the Customer Service website. This file must be upgraded separately from the main firmware.

To upgrade the audio files on VSG-4TSG, follow these steps:

1. On the Configuration pane, select Upgrade Firmware.

2. Below Select Audio File Package for Upgrade, click Browse and choose the appropriate file.

3. Click Audio File Upgrade.

An upgrading message appears.

After the file is transferred, a Loss of Connection message displays on the screen while the upgrade continues. To monitor the status of the upgrade, you can check the status on the VSG-4TSG front panel.

VSG-4TSG reboots itself as the upgrade continues. The LEDs on the front panel flash and the LCD displays "Imagine Communications".

When the upgrade is complete, normal parameter menus appear on the LCD.

4. To confirm the upgrade, check the Audio File Rev version under Device Info.

See Device Information (on page 75).

Upgrading Leap Second Files

The leap second file is necessary if leap second adjustment is required. This file can be downloaded from the Customer Service website.

To upgrade leap second files on VSG-4TSG, follow these steps:

1. On the Configuration pane, select Upgrade Firmware.

2. Click Browse and choose the appropriate upgrade package file.

3. Click Leap Second File Upload.

An upgrading message appears.

4. To confirm the upgrade, check the parameters at VSG-4TSG\Status\Leap Second.

Downloading MIB Files

To download the MIB file from VSG-4TSG, follow these steps:

1. On the Configuration pane, select Upgrade Firmware.

2. Click Download beside the MIB file name.

3. Choose a location to save the MIB to on your PC.

See SNMP Agent and MIBs (on page 167) for information about using the MIB file.

Page 72: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 5

Installation and Operation Manual Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 72

Bitmap Management

You can load customized pictures for use as patterns for the video signal generator. VSG-4TSG supports 24-bit bitmap format (.bmp) and JPEG (.jpg) format. The overall available storage on board for the picture files is 512 MB.

Only the following resolutions are supported:

720x486: For 525i

720x576: For 625i

1280x720: For 720p

1920x1080: For 1080i, 1080p, 1080psf

2048x1080: For 2Kp, 2Kpsf

Figure 38: Bitmap Management Screen

Columns in the Bitmap Files list can be sorted by the column headers.

To return to the main Configuration screen, click the left-pointing arrow beside Control Panel.

Loading a Bitmap

It is possible to load the bitmap files from PC or a USB hard drive inserted into the front panel of the module. When loading from a USB hard drive, the files must be located in the folder "logos" under the root directory. Only files with the supported resolutions will appear. To load a bitmap, follow these steps:

Page 73: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 5

Installation and Operation Manual Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 73

1. Click Add from PC or Add from U Disk (USB hard drive).

2. Browse to the file you want to load and click OK.

The file is added to the list on the Bitmap Management screen.

Applying a Bitmap

To apply a bitmap on the SDI outputs, follow these steps:

1. In the parameter menu tree, configure the Outputs > SDI x > Pattern > Pattern Select parameter to User Bitmap, and then click Control Panel to return to the Configuration tab.

2. On the Configuration tab, click Bitmap Management.

3. Put the computer mouse on the expected image file.

If that file is suitable for the SDI destination, the Apply to SDI x button becomes available.

4. Click Apply to SDI 1 or Apply to SDI 2.

Note: If the SDI 2 Follow SDI 1 parameter is enabled, then only the Apply to SDI 1 button can be active. After clicking it, both outputs are loaded with an identical bitmap.

Deleting a Bitmap

You may need to delete bitmaps because the list has become unwieldy, or because you need to make room to add more bitmaps. Follow these steps:

1. On the Configuration tab, click Bitmap Management.

2. Select one or several rows (files) you want to delete in the Bitmap Files list.

3. Click Delete.

4. If you are sure, click OK.

The file is removed from the list.

Page 74: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 5

Installation and Operation Manual Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 74

Wave Management

You can load customized audio wave files (.wav) and use them as the patterns for the audio signal generator. Audio wave files should be in PCM format and signed 16/20/24 bits, 48000Hz, stereo. The supported maximum duration is 02’10", and the overall available storage on board for wave files is 512 MB.

Figure 39: Wave Management Dialog Box

To return to the main Configuration screen, click the left-pointing arrow beside Control Panel.

Loading a Wave

It is possible to load .Wav files from PC or USB hard drive to the module. When loading from USB hard drive, the files must be located in the folder "waves" under the root directory. Only files with the supported 48K sampling rate will appear. To load a .Wav file, follow these steps:

1. On the Wave Management screen, click Add to PC or Add from U Disk (USB hard drive).

2. Browse to the file you want to load and click OK.

The file is added to the list on the Wave Management screen.

If there is not room to add a file, you will see an error message. Delete some files and try your upload again. If your file is too large, you will see an error message.

Applying a Wave File

To apply wave audio, follow these steps:

Page 75: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 5

Installation and Operation Manual Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 75

1. In the parameter menu tree, configure the Outputs > Audio > Audio Generator > User > User Gen x > Type parameter to Wave File, and then click Control Panel to return to the Configuration tab.

2. On the Configuration tab, click Wave Management.

3. Put the computer mouse on the expected wave file.

If that file is suitable for the SDI destination, the Apply to User Gen x button becomes available.

4. Click Apply to User Gen 1 or Apply to User Gen 2.

5. Confirm that the User Gen output is properly routed to the required audio output channels.

Deleting a Wave File

You may need to delete bitmaps because the list has become unwieldy, or because you need to make room to add more bitmaps. Follow these steps:

1. On the Configuration tab, click Wave Management.

2. Select a row (file) you want to delete in the Wave Files list.

3. Click Delete.

4. If you are sure, click OK.

The file is removed from the list.

Device Information

This page shows the software and hardware version information for the device.

Page 76: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 5

Installation and Operation Manual Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 76

To view this information, from the Configuration tab, click Device Information.

Figure 40: Device Information Screen

Items on this page are read-only; you cannot change information in this screen.

Table 23: Device Information Descriptions

Parameter Name Description

Model Name The model name of the unit

Serial Number The serial number of the unit

Software Rev. The build revision of the application firmware

Audio File Rev The build revision of the audio file

FPGA Rev. The build revision of the FPGA

TSG FPGA Rev. The build revision of the TSG board's FPGA

Front Panel Rev. The build revision of the front panel firmware

CPLD Rev. The build revision of the CPLD

Page 77: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 5

Installation and Operation Manual Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 77

Parameter Name Description

File System Rev. The file system revision

OS Rev. The date and time that the operating system software was created

Boot Rev. The date and time that the boot software was created

MAC Address The MAC address of the unit

Options A list of any installed options

To return to the main Configuration screen, click the left-pointing arrow beside Control Panel.

User Account

The default login account is Administrator, with no password (blank). It has the highest (administrator) level of authority.

You can create, delete, and change user accounts on VSG-4TSG. On the Configuration main page, click User Account to open the Password Manager screen.

Figure 41: Password Manager Screen

The VSG-4TSG has the following user IDs:

Administrator—Can perform all administrative functions on the frame, including upgrading module firmware, altering parameter settings, creating and applying presets, modifying user accounts, etc.

System—Can perform all the above tasks, except for editing user accounts.

Operator—Has no authority to control the VSG-4TSG. All parameters are read-only except the favorites.

To return to the main Configuration screen, click the left-pointing arrow beside Control Panel.

Page 78: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 5

Installation and Operation Manual Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 78

Adding a User Account

To add a user account, follow these steps:

1. On the Password Manager screen, under the type of user account (Administrator, System, or Operator) you want to create, click Edit Users.

The screen updates to display a table of user names of that type.

2. Click Add to create a new row.

3. Enter a user name and password for the new account.

The user name should be no longer than 30 characters and the password can be up to 20 characters long. User names and passwords can include numbers and upper and lower case letters. No other characters are allowed.

4. Click Save.

Modifying a User Account

The only change you can make to a user account is to its password.

To change a user account, follow these steps:

1. On the Password Manager screen, under the type of user account (Administrator, System, or Operator) you want to modify, click Edit Users.

The screen updates to display a table of user names of that type.

2. Select the row (user) to modify, and click Change Password.

3. Type the new password in both fields where it is required.

Passwords can be up to 20 characters long, and can include numbers and upper and lower case letters. No other characters are allowed.

4. Click Save.

If you have only one Administrator account, and you inadvertently lock yourself out of it (assign and then forget the password), contact Customer Service.

Deleting a User Account

To delete a user account, follow these steps:

1. On the Password Manager screen, under the type of user account (Administrator, System, or Operator) you want to delete, click Edit Users.

The screen updates to display a table of user names of that type.

2. Select the row for the account you want to get rid of.

3. Click Delete.

4. Click Yes to confirm.

You cannot delete the default Administrator account on the system.

Page 79: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 5

Installation and Operation Manual Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 79

Using the Faults and Events Tab The Faults and Events tab has three sub-tabs, while also displaying the Summary panel. See the following topics:

Active Faults Tab (on page 79)

Live Events Tab (on page 80)

Log Tab (on page 81)

Active Faults Tab

The contents of this screen match the Active Faults Panel. (see "Active Faults Panel" on page 61)

Figure 42: Active Faults Panel

Table 24: Active Faults Panel Columns

Column Description

Ack Whether the fault has been acknowledged

Time Issued The point at which the fault was triggered (some conditions must be in an activated state for a period of time before the Fault is triggered)

Fault Name The name of the fault

Data If necessary, more information about the fault may be presented here; this field can be empty

Error Level Indicates the severity of the fault as Major (6-10) or Minor (1-5)

Count Number of times this fault has been triggered (you can usually clear this count by resetting the module)

Parameter Configure Provides a hyperlink to a specific control associated with correcting the fault.

Page 80: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 5

Installation and Operation Manual Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 80

Live Events Tab

The Live Events log lists JAM events that have occurred since the session began (since the VSG-4TSG web page was opened).

Figure 43: Live Events Tab

Clear All empties the Live Events list.

Time Issued is the point at which the fault was triggered (some conditions must be in an activated state for a period of time before the Fault is triggered).

The Data column displays ore information about the fault; this field can be empty.

To view events that took place prior to your web page being opened, click the Log (see Log Tab (on page 81) for more information). You can sort by the Fault/Event Name column to see the events.

Page 81: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 5

Installation and Operation Manual Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 81

Log Tab

The fault log is primarily for troubleshooting purposes. It can contain up to 10,000 faults or 1 MB of data. When you download or refresh the fault log, you must load the entire log.

Figure 44: Opening the Fault Log

Opening a Log

If you have previously opened a log during this session (since connecting this PC via browser to the frame), when you click on the Log tab, the downloaded log is automatically opened. Because the log is downloaded to a cache on the PC, to see the most recent faults and events, you need to refresh it.

1. Click the Log tab.

2. Click Load Log, if necessary.

Other actions you can perform include the following:

To refresh the log, click Refresh.

To delete the contents of the Log, click Clear Log.

When the log has been cleared and new faults and events are generated, the first new index will start again 1.

This button only appears after successful parsing of the alarm log.

The Time Issued field in the log file displays the time when an event occurred. It can take up to ten seconds for an event to be available to the log file. To view very recent events, you may need to refresh the log file after opening it.

Exporting a Log

To save a log for future reference before clearing, you can export it.

1. In the log, click Export.

Page 82: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 5

Installation and Operation Manual Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 82

A browse dialog box appears.

2. Choose a location to save the log.

3. Enter a new file name for the log, and then click Save.

This saves the log locally on the connected PC. Logs are exported as comma-delimited files that can be opened in a spreadsheet program such as Microsoft Excel.

Sorting Log Data

By default, the Log sorts faults and events by their index number, with the most recent item first.

You can sort by the column headers.

By sorting the rows in the log, you can determine how long a fault takes to be acknowledged and cleared and the frequency with which various devices have certain types of faults. For example, by sorting by the Fault/Event Name column, you could retrieve the following sequence of events:

A fault initially appears in the log, with its color indicating its severity (red or yellow).

The fault is acknowledged by any operator on the system, and another row with that fault on it appears, but this time in orange.

The error condition is corrected, and the fault appears a third time in the fault log, but this time the row is white.

Note: You will not see this dynamically in the log. To view fault and event receipts, acknowledgements, and clears on the fly, use the Active Faults panel. See Active Faults Panel.

Table 25: Log Table Column Headers

Column Header Function

Index Displays a number indicating the order in which the fault or event was added to the list. When the log is cleared, the next index is 1.

Module Name VSG-4TSG

Time Issued When the fault or event was triggered.

Note: Some conditions must be in an activated state for a period of time before the fault or event is triggered.

Fault/Event Name The name of the fault or event. Descriptions of all the faults can be found in Faults List. Jams are listed as [EVENT].

Data More information about the fault or event; this field can be empty. Jam events are described fully. See Jam Log Contents for an explanation.

Priority A number from 1-10 assigned to the fault to indicate its severity; major faults have a severity of 6-10, and Minor faults have a severity of 1-5. All Jams have a priority of 0.

Count Number of instances of this fault currently active. All Jam events have a count of 0.

Ack Whether the fault or event has been acknowledged; an entry can only be acknowledged once.

Page 83: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 5

Installation and Operation Manual Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 83

Column Header Function

Triggered Yes indicates that the fault is currently active

No indicates that the fault is not currently active

All Jam events indicate they were triggered.

Fault ID The specific fault or event location within the protocol; this is sometimes required when troubleshooting the system.

The color of each row in the Log indicates the state or severity of the fault, as follows:

Table 26: Log Fault Color Definitions

Color Description

Red Major fault (severity 6-10)

Yellow Minor fault (severity 1-5)

Orange Acknowledged fault

White Cleared fault

All events, failed or successful, are white in the log file.

Using Presets A preset is like a snapshot of VSG-4TSG's parameters. You can create a preset from one VSG-4TSG, and then load it onto another VSG-4TSG, or use varying presets to configure VSG-4TSG for different tasks. VSG-4TSG can support up to a maximum of 20 preset files on board.

Note: The preset files for phase 1 and phase 2 firmware of the VSG-4TSG are not compatible.

To view the preset tool for the VSG-4TSG web interface, select the Configuration button at the top of the screen. The Preset tool appears at the left of the window.

Figure 45: Preset Options

Page 84: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 5

Installation and Operation Manual Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 84

Click an item in the Preset list and the Load button becomes available.

Creating a Preset

A preset is a snapshot of the settings of all the parameters on an individual VSG-4TSG at the point when the preset was created. To create a preset using the VSG-4TSG web interface, follow these steps:

1. In the VSG-4TSG web application, select the Configuration tab.

2. Click Edit > New in the Presets panel at the left of the screen.

The Create New Preset dialog box opens.

3. Enter a descriptive name (maximum 24 characters) for your preset.

You cannot look at the settings of a preset to find out if it’s the one you want; you have to load the preset to view its settings, so a descriptive name is important. Preset names can contain numbers and upper and lower case letters. Special characters are not allowed.

4. Click OK.

Your preset is saved.

Loading a Preset

The process of applying the settings included in a preset file is referred to as Loading. When loading presets, you may need to wait some time for changes to appear.

To load a preset file to a VSG-4TSG, follow these steps:

1. In the VSG-4TSG web application, select the Configuration tab.

2. Click on a preset in the list at the left side of the screen.

3. Click Load.

The selected preset is loaded.

Be careful when loading presets to ensure that the firmware is consistent between like devices. If parameters are not available or have settings that are inconsistent with the firmware on a device, those settings are ignored, and the default setting is chosen instead.

Renaming a Preset 1. In the VSG-4TSG web application, select the Configuration tab.

2. Select a preset from the list at the left side of the screen.

Page 85: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 5

Installation and Operation Manual Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 85

3. Select Edit > Rename from the menu at the top of the list.

The Rename Preset dialog box opens.

4. Enter a new name for the preset, and then click OK.

Preset names can contain numbers and upper and lower case letters. Special characters are not allowed.

The preset’s name is updated immediately in the open list. The update may not appear in other lists where that preset appears (on other connected PCs also viewing VSG-4TSG through the web interface, for example) until you click Refresh.

Using Factory Recall

Factory recall returns all parameters on VSG-4TSG to their default settings.

To return VSG-4TSG to its default parameter settings, follow these steps:

1. In the Configuration panel, open the System Explorer section of the screen.

2. Select Edit > Factory Recall.

Figure 46: Factory Recall Selected

3. On the confirmation dialog box that appears, click OK to continue (otherwise, click Cancel to abort).

The VSG-4TSG returns to its default parameter settings.

When resetting to factory defaults, you may need to wait a few seconds for change to appear.

Deleting a Preset

You can only delete one preset at a time.

1. In the VSG-4TSG application, select the Configuration tab.

2. Click on a preset in the column on the left of the screen.

3. Select Edit > Delete.

Page 86: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 5

Installation and Operation Manual Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 86

4. In the Delete Preset dialog box, click OK.

The preset’s name is removed immediately in the open list. The update may not appear in other lists where that preset appears (in Device Presets lists for other PCs connected to the VSG-4TSG) until you click Refresh.

Overwriting a Preset 1. In the VSG-4TSG web application, select the Configuration tab.

2. Click on a preset in the list at the left of the screen.

3. Select Edit > Overwrite.

The Overwrite Preset dialog box opens.

The Preset Name field indicates the preset that will be overwritten. A preset cannot be renamed from this dialog box.

4. Click OK.

Exporting a Preset

When you export a preset, you save it to the computer on which you are browsing to the VSG-4TSG. You could do this to store more than 20 presets for the device, or as an interim stage before transferring it to a different VSG-4TSG. Follow these steps:

1. In the VSG-4TSG web application, select the Configuration tab.

2. Click on a preset in the left portion of the screen.

3. Select Edit > Export.

The Export Preset dialog opens.

4. Select a location for the preset to be stored in, and then click OK.

Presets are stored as XML files.

Importing a Preset

To import a preset using the VSG-4TSG web interface, follow these steps:

1. In the VSG-4TSG web application, select the Configuration tab.

2. Select Device Presets in the left area of the screen.

3. Click Edit > Import.

The Import Preset dialog opens.

4. Browse to the location where your presets are stored, and then select a preset.

5. Click OK.

You may need to click Refresh to see the preset on other applicable devices.

Page 87: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 5

Installation and Operation Manual Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 87

Faults Tab Click a row to highlight it.

The yellow row in the table below is currently active.

The blue row below is selected.

When a row (fault) is selected, the right-most panel of the screen updates with configuration options for that fault.

Configuring Module Faults

You can configure faults on the Configuration > Faults tab.

Whether it is selected or not, the Faults tab indicates if VSG-4TSG has a fault by displaying either a yellow (minor) or red (major) fault indicator.

At the top of the panel, you can sort the faults list using the following check boxes:

Sort all by active—Puts active faults at the top of the list. Active major faults are highlighted in red. Active minor faults are highlighted in yellow.

Show All—Displays all active and inactive faults for the module in a continuous list.

When you select this option, you can filter the fault list by entering a keyword in the Sort by Name field (which appears when Show All is selected).

Click the page numbers to the right of the Show All check box to view other pages of faults.

You can also sort the faults by the column headers, as described below.

Page 88: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 5

Installation and Operation Manual Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 88

Table 27: Fault Column Headers

Column Header Description

ID [RO] A sequential label for the fault—each fault has an unique ID, starting from 1

Fault Name [RO] A short description of the fault that you can use to find a longer description in the module’s manual, or in its HTML parameter list

Error Level [RO] An indicator of the priority of the alarm:

Major faults display red when active, and have a priority of 6-10

Minor faults display yellow when active, and have a priority of 1-5

Enable/Disable The master setting that determines whether the alarm will activate

Enable—the defined condition generates a fault

Disable—the condition is ignored

By default, all faults are disabled.

Priority A number from 1-10 indicating whether a triggered fault is reported as major or minor; a priority of 6 or higher is a major fault, and a priority of 5 or lower is a minor fault

Trigger (sec) The duration over which the fault condition must exist (in seconds) before the fault is triggered. If the fault level is reached for less time than the Trigger duration, then the fault will not trigger. Choose any duration from 0 to 100 seconds. If Trigger is set to 0 and the fault condition exists for any period of time, the fault is triggered.

Clear (sec) The amount of time the fault condition must be in abatement in order for the fault to be turned off. Choose any duration from 0 to 100 seconds. If Clear is set to 0 and the fault condition ceases for any period of time, the fault is cleared.

Ack An indicator as to whether or not the alarm has been acknowledged; when a fault is active, click this option to allow other users on the network to see that you have acknowledged the fault

Active [RO] An indicator of whether the alarm is active (triggered) or inactive

Faults List

At the VSG-4TSG front panel, each fault has the following selections:

Enable: Enables the alarm.

Unchecked (off)

Checked (on)

Duration: Period of time that the alarm condition must exist prior to the sysstem indicating the alarm, with a range of 0 to 60 seconds and a default of 2 seconds.

Table 28: VSG-4TSG Alarm Descriptions

Alarm Description

Loss of Primary Source Indicates that the system is no longer receiving data from the primary source

Page 89: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 5

Installation and Operation Manual Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 89

Alarm Description

Loss of Secondary Source Indicates that the system is no longer receiving data from the secondary source

Loss of Source Time Lock Indicates that the system is no longer time locked with the active source

Loss of Source Freq Lock Indicates that the system is no longer frequency locked with the active source

Loss of REF Indicates that the system is no longer detecting reference

Loss of GPS Indicates that the system is no longer detecting the GPS source

Loss of NTP Indicates that the system is no longer detecting the NTP source

Loss of PTP Indicates that the system is no longer detecting the PTP source

Loss of ENET Indicates that the system is no longer detecting the Ethernet link

Loss of LTC Indicates that the system is no longer detecting the LTC source

LTC Frozen Indicates that the system is no longer detecting a changing time in the LTC source. This alarm will only occur if the LTC source is present.

Loss of VITC Indicates that the system is no longer detecting the VITC source

VITC Line Mismatch Indicates that the system is detecting a difference between the detected VITC line in the source and the selected VITC line in the VITC Config menu. This alarm will only occur if the VITC source is present and that the VITC source is either the primary or secondary source.

VITC Frozen Indicates that the system is no longer detecting a changing time in the VITC source. This alarm will only occur is the VITC source is present.

Loss of PS1 Indicates that the system is no longer detecting power supply 1

Loss of PS2 Indicates that the system is no longer detecting power supply 2

Frame Rate Mismatch of Sync 1 Indicates that the system detects that the REF IN and the Sync 1 video formats are mismatched

Frame Rate Mismatch of SDI 1 Indicates that the system detects that the REF IN and the SDI 1 video formats are mismatched

Frame Rate Mismatch of SDI 2 Indicates that the system detects that the REF IN and the SDI 2 video formats are mismatched

Frame Rate Mismatch of PGM 1 Indicates that the system detects that the REF IN and the PGM 1 video formats are mismatched

Frame Rate Mismatch of PGM 2 Indicates that the system detects that the REF IN and the PGM 2 video formats are mismatched

Frame Rate Mismatch of PGM 3 Indicates that the system detects that the REF IN and the PGM 3 video formats are mismatched

Page 90: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 5

Installation and Operation Manual Using the VSG-4TSG Web UI

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 90

Modifying a Fault's Properties 1. Click a row in the Fault table.

To the right of the table, that fault’s properties appear as parameters.

2. Use standard parameter modification tools to change the fault’s properties.

Changes take place immediately.

Page 91: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 91

Parameters and Functions Parameters can be accessed from the block diagram or the All list.

Block Diagram Parameter Organization (on page 91)

All List Parameter Organization (on page 95)

An asterisk (*) is shown next to the default menu selections.

Parameters that are read-only are marked with grey.

Block Diagram Parameter Organization Parameter menus can be accessed by clicking on areas of the block diagram.

Chapter 6

Page 92: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 92

Figure 47: VSG-4TSG Block Diagram View

The top center of the diagram consists largely of inputs.

PTP Config (on page 98)

NTP Config (on page 98)

GPS Config (on page 98)

LTC Config (on page 98)

VITC Config (on page 99)

Primary & Secondary Source Select (on page 95)

Primary / Secondary Phase Offset

Video TimeBase (on page 96)

Other TimeBase (on page 97)

Source Jam (on page 97)

Below the inputs, unit configuration options and status (read-only) parameters are accessible.

Page 93: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 93

Status

Time Source Status (on page 137)

Primary (see "Primary / Secondary" on page 137)

Secondary

Input Status (on page 139)

Output Status (on page 144)

Leap Second (on page 150)

Unit Configuration

Local Time (on page 134)

Front Panel (on page 134)

IP (on page 135)

DST

General (on page 136)

Enable (on page 136)

Reboot (on page 136)

Outputs are found at the right of the screen.

NTP and PTP Output Parameters (on page 132)

Sync 1 (menu)

Format (on page 116)

Time Code (on page 117)

Jam Sync (on page 118)

Output Timing (on page 119)

DARS and Word Clock Output Parameters (on page 132)

Time Code 1, 2 (on page 120)

Time Code (on page 120)

Jam Sync (on page 121)

Output Timing (on page 122)

PGM 1, 2, 3 Output Parameters (on page 111)

Sync (on page 112)

Composite (see "Composite (PGM 1 Only)" on page 112)

Time Code (on page 113)

Jam Sync (on page 115)

Output Timing (on page115)

You can use the Audio Generator parameters to define output audio test signals.

Page 94: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 94

Sequence (on page 122)

Tones (on page 125)

User Gen ( 1 and 2) (on page 126)

AES 1 and AES 2 (on page 131)

Analog Audio (on page 131)

You can use the SDI Generator parameters to define two sets of output video test signals.

SDI Format (see "Format" on page 101)

Test Pattern (see "Pattern" on page 102)

Output Modifiers (menu)

Components (on page 104)

Movement (on page 104)

Scrolling Bars (on page 104)

OSD Source ID (on page 105)

Safe Area (on page 105)

Switch Point Pattern (on page 106)

Audio Embed (menu)

Output Control (on page 129)

Source Select (on page 129)

Audio V Bit (on page 130)

Audio Non-PCM Bit (on page 130)

Audio Word Length (on page 130)

Time (menu)

Time Code (on page 107)

Jam Sync (on page 108)

Output Timing (on page 109)

Metadata (menu)

AFD/WSS/VI (on page 109)

ATC/DVITC (see "ATC/D-VITC" on page 111)

Output Select (SDI 2 Only) (on page 101)

The GPI Config parameters define the causes and effects of the GPI triggers.

GPI Config (see "Other" on page 132)

Page 95: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 95

All List Parameter Organization If there is no link at a level, then no parameters are available at that level.

Sources

The Sources menu reveals the following sets of parameters:

Source Select (on page 95)

Phase Offsets (on page 96)

Primary

Video TimeBase (on page 96)

Other TimeBase (on page 97)

Secondary

Video TimeBase (on page 96)

Other TimeBase (on page 97)

Source Jam (on page 97)

PTP Config (on page 98)

NTP Config (on page 98)

GPS Config (on page 98)

LTC Config (on page 98)

VITC Config (on page 99)

Table 29: Source Select

Parameter Name Description Selection

Primary Source Select

Selects the primary source; see Source Detection and Failover for details.

GPS_GPS

GPS_Video

GPS_Freerun

NTP_10 MHz

NTP_Video

NTP_Freerun

PTP_PTP

LTC_10 MHz

LTC_Video

LTC_Freerun

VITC_Video *

LOCAL_10 MHz

LOCAL_Video

LOCAL_PTP

LOCAL_Freerun

Page 96: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 96

Parameter Name Description Selection

Secondary Source Select

Selects the secondary source; see Source Detection and Failover for details.

GPS_GPS

GPS_Video

GPS_Freerun

NTP_10 MHz

NTP_Video

NTP_Freerun

PTP_PTP

LTC_10 MHz

LTC_Video

LTC_Freerun

VITC_Video

LOCAL_10 MHz

LOCAL_Video *

LOCAL_PTP

LOCAL_Freerun

Failover Return Determines whether the source failover will switch back to the original source if it becomes available after failing over; see Source Detection and Failover for details

Auto *

Manual

Phase Offsets

There are both primary and secondary phase offsets. Both offsets have two sets of settings.

Video TimeBase (on page 96)

Other TimeBase (on page 97)

Primary/Secondary

The same parameters appear for both the primary and secondary sources.

Table 30: Video TimeBase

Parameter Description Options

Horizontal Adjusts horizontal phase for the output.

1080 (2K)@ 29/30/59/60:

1080(2K) @ 25/50:

1080(2K) @ 23/24/47/48:

720p @ 59/60:

720p @ 50:

720p @ 29/30 :

720p @ 25 :

720p @ 23/24 :

525i:

625i:

+/-2199

+/-2639

+/-2749

+/-1649

+/-1979

+/-3299

+/-3959

+/-4124

+/-857

+/-863

Vertical Adjusts vertical phase for the output.

1080/2K:

720p:

625i:

525i:

+/-1124

+/-749

+/-624

Page 97: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 97

Parameter Description Options

Frame Adjusts frame timing offset for SDI output.

29/30/59/60 fps:

25/50 fps:

23/24/47/48 fps:

+/-29

+/-24

+/-23

Table 31: Other TimeBase

Parameter Name Description Selection Option

Polarity Determines to apply a positive or negative offset.

+ (plus)

- (minus)

Millisecond Configures the offset in millisecond (ms) range.

0 - 999

Microsecond Configures the offset in microsecond (us) range.

0 - 999

Clocks Configures the offset in clock (27MHz) range.

0 - 26

Table 32: Source Jam

Parameter Description Options

Force Source Jam Forces the system to immediately sync to the input source.

Off *

On

Schedule Select The repetition rate that the Jam occurs Daily Schedule

Weekly Schedule

Monthly Schedule *

Monthly Schedule Date

Repeats the jam once per month on the specified day.

1 - 31 [Day of Month]

Monthly Schedule Time

Determines the time of day the jam occurs. HH:MM:SS

Weekly Schedule Day Repeats the jam once per week on the specified day.

Mon *

Tue

Wed

Thur

Fri

Sat

Sun

Weekly Schedule Time Determines the time of day the jam occurs. HH:MM:SS

Page 98: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 98

Parameter Description Options

Daily Schedule Time Determines the time of day the jam occurs. HH:MM:SS

Table 33: PTP Config

Parameter Description Options

Offset Enable Enables the PTP offset feature Off *

On

Offset The offset applied to the received PTP date and time

+/-HH:MM:SS

Table 34: NTP Config

Parameter Description Options

IP Address (1 - 5) The IP address of an NTP server [X]XX.XXX.XXX.XXX

Apply IP Activate the new addresses for the NTP servers.

Off *

On

Offset Enable Enables the NTP offset feature Off *

On

Offset The offset applied to the received NTP date and time

+/-HH:MM:SS

Table 35: GPS Config

Parameter Description Options

Device The selected GPS device GPS-3903

GPS-3904*

Offset Enable Enables the GPS offset feature Off *

On

Offset The offset applied to the received GPS date and time

+/-HH:MM:SS

Table 36: LTC Config

Parameter Description Options

LTC Read Date Determines if the date should be read from the LTC data

Off

On *

LTC Read Time Zone Determines if the time zone information should be read from the LTC data

Off

Page 99: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 99

Parameter Description Options

On *

LTC Read AUX Read the AUX bits from Leitch 12M time code. If the incoming time code is not Leitch 12M, set this parameter to Off

Off *

On

Offset Enable Enables the LTC offset feature Off *

On

Offset The offset applied to the received LTC date and time

+/-HH:MM:SS

Table 37: VITC Config

Parameter Description Options

VITC Line Position Determines which video horizontal line from which to extract VITC data.

6

22

Auto* (automatically determines the first horizontal video line in which VITC is detected)

VITC Read Date Determines if the date should be read from the VITC data

Off

On *

VITC Read Time Zone Determines if the time zone information should be read from the VITC data

Off

On *

VITC Read AUX Read the AUX bits from Leitch 12M time code. If the incoming time code is not Leitch 12M, set this parameter to Off.

Off *

On

Offset Enable Enables the VITC offset feature Off *

On

Offset The offset applied to the received VITC date and time

+/-HH:MM:SS

Page 100: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 100

Outputs

Opening the Outputs menu reveals the following parameters:

SDI 1 & SDI 2

Output Select (SDI 2 Only) (on page 101)

Format (on page 101)

Pattern (on page 102)

Output Modifiers

Components (on page 104)

Movement (on page 104)

Scrolling Bars (on page 104)

OSD Source ID (on page 105)

Safe Area (on page 105)

Switch Point Pattern (on page 106)

Time

Time Code (on page 107)

Jam Sync (on page 108)

Output Timing (on page 109)

Metadata

AFD/WSS/VI (on page 109)

ATC/D-VITC (on page 111)

PGM 1, 2, 3 Output Parameters (on page 111)

Sync (on page 112)

Composite (PGM 1 Only) (on page 112)

Time Code (on page 113)

Jam Sync (on page 115)

Output Timing (on page 115)

Sync 1

Format (on page 116)

Time Code (on page 117)

Jam Sync (on page 118)

Output Timing (on page 119)

LTC Output Parameters (on page 120) (LTC 1 and LTC 2)

Time Code (on page 120)

Jam Sync (on page 121)

Output Timing (on page 122)

Audio

Audio Generator

Sequence (on page 122)

Tones (on page 125)

o (8 sub-items)

User

o User Gen ( 1 and 2) (on page 126)

Embed SDI 1, 2

Output Control (on page 129)

Source Select (on page 129)

Audio V Bit (on page 130)

Audio Non-PCM Bit (on page 130)

Audio Word Length (on page 130)

AES 1 and AES 2 (on page 131)

Analog Audio (on page 131)

NTP/PTP SEL (see "NTP and PTP Output Parameters" on page 132)

DARS/WC SEL (see "DARS and Word Clock Output Parameters" on page 132)

Page 101: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 101

SDI Output Parameters

These parameters apply to SDI 1 and SDI 2 outputs.

Table 38: Output Select (SDI 2 Only)

Parameter Name Description Selection Option

SDI 2 Follows SDI 1

SDI 2 configuration will use the SDI 1 configuration. SDI 2 settings will not be affective until this setting is off.

Off

On *

Table 39: Format

Parameter Description Selection Options

Standard SDI output video standard. SDI 2 is not independently configurable for all standards.

SD * - SDI 1 and SDI 2 are independently configured.

HD - SDI 1 and SDI 2 are independently configured.

DL HD - SDI 1 configuration determines SDI 2 output (dual-link).

3G Level A - SDI 1and SDI 2 are independently configured.

DL 3G Level B - SDI 1 and SDI 2 are independently configured.

DS 3G Level B - SDI 2 output is the same as SDI 1 output configuration.

Format SDI output video format. 525 *

625

720p

1080i

1080p

1080psF

2K 1080p

2K 1080psF

Field/Frame Rate SDI output video frame rate. 23.98

24

25

29.97

30

50

59.94*

60

Sampling Structure

SDI output video sampling structure. Only the structures supported for the currently select Standard will be listed.

4:2:2 YCbCr*

4:4:4 YCbCr

4:4:4:4 YCbCrA

4:4:4 RGB

4:4:4:4 RGBA

Bit Depth SDI output video bit depth. Only the depths supported for the currently selected Video Format will be listed.

10-bit*

12-bit

Page 102: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 102

Parameter Description Selection Options

Loading Status [RO]

Indicates the process when loading a graphic pattern or user bitmap.

Completed

Loading

Table 40: Pattern

Parameter Description Selection Options

Pattern Select Selects which type of pattern is to be shown on the SDI output.

Color Bars *

Graphics

Sequence

User Bitmap

Color Bars Selects the color bars test signal. Not all test signals are available for all standards and formats. See Supported Output Test Signals and Video Standards (see "Supported Output Test Signals" on page 102).

RP-219 with +I

RP-219 with -I

RP-219 100% White

RP-219 75% White

SMPTE Bars

100% Color Bars

75% Color Bars *

Graphics Selects the graphic test signal. Not all test signals are available for all standards and formats. See Supported Output Test Signals and Video Standards (see "Supported Output Test Signals" on page 102).

<Pattern>

Sequence Step Duration

The step duration for the sequence pattern, measured in seconds.

1 - 10

Loading Status Indicates the process when loading a graphic pattern or user bitmap.

Completed

Loading

Supported Output Test Signals

The below table shows the supported video test patterns for each video standard.

Cat. Pattern SDI 1/2 PGM 1

525 625 1080i 1080p/

50, 59,60 1080p, 1080psf, 720p

2Kp, 2Kpsf

NTSC PAL

Color Bars SMPTE Bars √ √

75% Color Bars √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

100% Color Bars √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

RP 219 +I √ √ √ √

Page 103: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 103

Cat. Pattern SDI 1/2 PGM 1

525 625 1080i 1080p/

50, 59,60 1080p, 1080psf, 720p

2Kp, 2Kpsf

NTSC PAL

RP 219 -I √ √ √ √

RP 219 White 100% √ √ √ √

RP 219 White 75% √ √ √ √

Graphics Zone Plate √ √ √ √ √ √

Visible Field √ √ √

Valid Ramp √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

V2A Timing √ √ √ √ √ √

Shallow Ramp √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

SDI Check Field √ √ √ √ √ √

Safe Area √ √ √ √ √ √

Safe Title √ √

Safe Action √ √

Production Aperture √ √ √ √

PRBS √ √ √ √ √ √

Pathological (PLL) √ √ √ √ √ √

Pathological (EQ) √ √ √ √ √ √

Multiburst √ √

Multiburst 1 to 15 MHz √ √ √ √

Multiburst 15 to 30 MHz √ √ √ √

Multiburst 35 to 60 MHz √

Line Sweep 100% √ √ √ √

Line Sweep 60% √ √ √ √

Limit Ramp √ √ √ √ √ √

Flat Field Red √ √ √ √ √ √

Flat Field 100% √ √ √ √ √ √

Flat Field 50% √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Flat Field 0% √ √ √ √ √ √

Co-Sited Pulse √ √ √ √ √ √

Convergence √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Page 104: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 104

Cat. Pattern SDI 1/2 PGM 1

525 625 1080i 1080p/

50, 59,60 1080p, 1080psf, 720p

2Kp, 2Kpsf

NTSC PAL

Bowtie 2.5MHz √ √

Black Burst √ √

AFD (4:3 in 4:3) √ √

AFD (4:3 in 16:9) √ √ √

AFD (16:9 in 16:9) √ √ √

5 Step √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

2T Pulse and Bar √ √ √ √

Output Modifiers

Table 41: Components

The Components modifier is not available for the pattern "Safe Area" and "PRBS".

Parameter Description Selection Options

Enable Y/G Enables the Y or Green components on the output.

Off

On*

Enable Cb/B Enables the Cb or Blue components on the output.

Off

On*

Enable Cr/R Enables the Cr or Red components on the output.

Off

On*

Table 42: Movement

These options configure a moving block on the SDI output active picture.

Parameter Description Selection Options

Enable Enables the movement feature Off *

On

Rate Relative speed of pattern movement test signal Slow

Med*

Fast

Page 105: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 105

Table 43: Scrolling Bars

These parameters become available when the Pattern Select parameter is set to Color Bars. When this function is enabled, the specified horizontal partition of Color Bars pattern scrolls in cycle.

Parameter Description Selection Options

Enable Enables the scrolling function. Off *

On

Rate Controls the scrolling speed Slow

Medium*

Fast

Bars Partition Selects which horizontal partition to be scrolling.

The available scrolling partitions for each Color Bars pattern are shown below:

SMPTE Bars (1,2,3)

75% Color Bars (1)

100% Color Bars (1)

RP 219 +l (1,2,3,4)

RP 219 -l (1,2,3,4)

RP 219 White 100% (1,2,3,4)

RP 219 White 75% (1,2,3,4)

Table 44: OSD Source ID

Parameter Description Selection Options

Enable Enables the OSD on the SDI output Off *

On

Select Selects the text to be shown. Source ID (1 - 5)

Text source ID (1 - 5) Configures the strings (maximum 19 characters) to be shown.

(string)

Table 45: Safe Area

Safe Area pattern is used to generate Safe Title, Safe Action or Customized Safe Area patterns. The Customized Safe Area is limited to 60%-99% of the image.

Parameter Description Selection Options

Safe Area Selection Selects the type of safe area. Safe Title ST2046 *

Safe Action ST2046

Safe Area Custom 1

Safe Area Custom 2

Page 106: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 106

Parameter Description Selection Options

Height Custom (1 - 2) Sets the height of the customized safe area. 60%-99% (default 90 for Custom 1, 93 for Custom 2)

Width Custom (1 - 2) Sets the width of the customized safe area. 60%-99% (default 90 for Custom 1, 93 for Custom 2)

Table 46: Switch Point Pattern

Parameter Description Selection Options

Enable Enable the Switch Point Pattern. Garbage data would be filled into the VANC area.

Off *

On

Fill HANC Enable to fill the garbage data in HANC area as well.

Off*

On

Start Line Selects the start line of the VANC area to fill the garbage data. The garbage data would be filled from start line to end of VANC area.

1 - 20

Blank Switch Line Controls whether to blank the switch line only when the Switch Point Pattern is enable.

Disabled: Not blank the switch line (fill the garbage data as well).

Entire Line: Blank the entire switch line.

Switch Area Only: Only blank the switch area of the switch line.

Switch Point Pattern is used to fill garbage data in the VANC area of the SDI outputs. When the two SDI outputs from the VSG-4TSG are fed into a router, it helps to identify the line where the switching takes place.

NOTE: When D-VITC is enabled for the SD standard, the Switch Point Pattern is disabled.

Garbage Data

In SDI 1, 3ABH would be filled in field 1 (frame), 3AAH would be filled in field 2.

In SDI 2, 041H would be filled in field 1 (frame), 042H would be filled in field 2.

Page 107: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 107

Time

Table 47: Time Code

Parameter Description Options

User Bits Format

Determines the content of the output time code User Bits (also known as User Binary Groups)

ST 309 * - SMPTE 309 YYMMDD format

Leitch 12M - Traditional Leitch 12M time code format with AUX bits for the time offset

Source ID - 4 ASCII characters, default is "USER"

Time Zone Determines the time zone to be applied to the output time. This is the offset in hours and minutes (hh:mm) from UTC (Coordinated Universal Time)

Follow Local* - applies the local time zone selection, as set in the Local Time Zone parameter under the Unit Configuration, Local Time

See Unit Configuration > Local Time > Local Time Zone for a list of UTC offsets.

Set Aux Offset Configures for Leitch 12M time code. +/- 12 in 0.5 hrs increments

Source ID The four character are encoded into the user binary groups 1 through 8. Each ASCII character represents two user groups where the first character (left most) are binary groups 1 and 2 and the fourth character (right most) are binary groups 7 and 8.

<four characters>

Offset Enable Enables adding offset to the output time. Off *

On

Offset Configures the time offset value. hh:mm:ss

Drop Frame For 29/59 fps only, determines whether the drop frame flag is present in the time code output.

Force Off

Force On

Follow Fmt *- The drop frame bit is automatically set high if the output video/time frame rate is 29/59 fps. Otherwise, the bit is set low.

Configuring for Leitch 12M Time Code

Leitch 12M is a traditional time code format which is supported in some older equipment like MTG-3901. In Leitch 12M time code, the BGF (Binary Group Flag) is defined as 000b, which is the same as the Unspecified time code format (the time code Source ID parameter in VSG-4TSG/CSD/MTG/TCG etc.

Page 108: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 108

products) as defined in SMPTE 12M-1. Therefore, it is impossible to automatically recognize the Leitch 12M time code. The VSG-4TSG can receive Leitch 12M time code from VITC or LTC inputs. If you know that the input time code is Leitch 12M, make the following settings:

Enable Read Date to receive the date info.

Enable Read AUX to receive the AUX offset info.

When using Leitch 12M time code, you can ignore the Read Time Zone parameter.

Note: If Leitch 12M is not used, "Read AUX" must be set as "Off".

To generate Leitch 12M time code for the outputs of VITC, LTC, D-VITC, and ATC, set the User Bits Format to Leitch 12M and configure Set Aux Offset appropriately.

Note: The configuration of "Time Zone" still affects the practical time value in the time code output. It is the same as adding a time offset, but there is no TZ info in Leitch 12M time code.

Table 48: Jam Sync

Parameter Description Selection Options

Jam Enable Enables output jam. Off

On *

Force Output Jam Forces the system to immediately jam the output time code

Off *

On

Follow Source Jam Enables the output jam simultaneously when the source jam occurs.

Off

On *

Schedule Select The repetition rate that the Jam occurs Daily Schedule

Weekly Schedule

Monthly Schedule*

Monthly Schedule Date

Repeats the jam once per month on the specified day.

1 - 31 [Day of Month]

Monthly Schedule Time

Determines the time of day the jam occurs. HH:MM:SS

Weekly Schedule Day Repeats the jam once per week on the specified day.

Mon *

Tue

Wed

Thur

Fri

Sat

Sun

Weekly Schedule Time Determines the time of day the jam occurs. HH:MM:SS

Daily Schedule Time Determines the time of day the jam occurs. HH:MM:SS

Page 109: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 109

Table 49: Output Timing

Parameter Description Options

Horizontal Adjusts horizontal phase for the output.

1080 (2K)@ 29/30/59/60:

1080(2K) @ 25/50:

1080(2K) @ 23/24/47/48:

720p @ 59/60 :

720p @ 50 :

720p @ 29/30 :

720p @ 25 :

720p @ 23/24 :

525i:

625i:

-2199 to 2199

-2639 to 2639

-2749 to 2749

-1649 to 1649

-1979 to 1979

-3299 to 3299

-3959 to 3959

-4124 to 4124

-857 to 857

-863 to 863

Vertical Adjusts vertical phase for the output. 1080/2K:

720p:

625i:

525i:

-1124 to 1124

-749 to 749

-624 to 624

-524 to 524

Frame Adjusts frame timing offset for SDI output.

29/30/59/60 fps:

25/50 fps:

23/24/47/48 fps:

-29 to 29

-24 to 24

-23 to 23

Metadata

Table 50: AFD/WSS/VI

Parameter Description Options

SD Out Aspect Ratio Selects the aspect ratio for AFD and VI insertion when the video standard is SD.

16:9

4:3 *

AFD Insert Enable Enables insertion of AFD on the video output.

Off *

On

AFD Insert Destination Selects the link to insert AFD. This parameter is only available if the video standard is dual link or dual stream.

Link A *

Link B

Both

AFD Embed Line Selects the line number to insert AFD. 12 to 19 (525i)

8 to 22 (625i)

9 to 20 (1080i/1080psf/2Kpsf)

9 to 41 (1080p/2Kp)

9 to 25 (720p)

Page 110: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 110

Parameter Description Options

AFD Select Selects the AFD contents to be inserted.

When the SD Out Aspect Ratio is 4:3:

16:9 top

14:9 top

>16:9 in 4:3

4:3 full *

16:9 |

14:9 |

4:3 a 14:9

16:9 | a 14:9

16:9 | a 4:3

When the SD Out Aspect Ratio is 16:9:

16:9 full

14:9 p

>16:9 in 16:9 *

4:3 p

16:9 prtctd

4:3 p a 14:9

16:9 a 14:9

16:9 a 4:3

VI Insert Enable Enables to insert VI on the video output. This parameter is only available for SD.

Off *

On

VI Embed Line

Selects the line number to insert VI. 12 to 19 (525i)

8 to 22 (625i)

VI Select Selects the VI contents to be inserted. When the SD Out Aspect Ratio is 4:3:

16:9 top

14:9 top

>16:9 in 4:3

4:3 full *

16:9 |

14:9 |

4:3 a 14:9

16:9 | a 14:9

16:9 | a 4:3

When the SD Out Aspect Ratio is 16:9:

16:9 full

14:9 p

>16:9 in 16:9 *

4:3 p

16:9 prtctd

4:3 p a 14:9

16:9 a 14:9

16:9 a 4:3

SD Out VI with AFD Controls whether the VI output supports the AFD upper bits part.

Off *

On

WSS Insert Enable Enables to insert WSS on the video output. This parameter is only available for625i.

Off *

On

WSS Embed Line Selects the line number to insert WSS. 8 - 23

WSS Select Selects the WSS contents to be inserted.

Full frame *

14:9 center

14:9 top

16:9 center

16:9 top

>16:9 center

Full a 14:9

16:9 Anamorphic

Page 111: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 111

Table 51: ATC/D-VITC

Parameter Description Options

ATC Insert Destination Selects the link to insert ATC. This parameter is only available if the video standard is dual link or dual stream.

Link A *

Link B

Both

ATC_LTC Enable Enables to insert ATC_LTC on the video output.

Off *

On

ATC_LTC Embed line

Selects the line number to insert ATC_LTC. 12 - 19 (default 13*) (525i)

8 - 22 (default 9*) (625i)

9 - 20 ( default 10*) (1080i)

9 - 41 (default 10*) (1080p)

9 - 25 (default 10*) (720p)

ATC_VITC Enable Enables to insert ATC_VITC on the video output.

Off *

On

ATC_VITC Embed Line Selects the line number to insert ATC_VITC. 12 - 19 (13*) (525i)

8 - 22 (9*) (625i)

9 - 20 (9*) (1080i)

9 - 41 (9*) (1080p)

9 - 25 (9*) (720p)

D-VITC Enable Enables to insert D-VITC on the video output. This parameter is only available for SD.

Off *

On

D-VITC Embed Line (1 - 2)

Selects the line number to insert D-VITC. 10 - 19 (default: 14 for Line 1, 16 for Line 2) (525i)

6 - 22 (default: 19 for Line 1, 21 for Line 2) (625i)

PGM 1, 2, 3 Output Parameters

Table 52: PGM 1, 2, 3

Parameter Name Description Selection Option

Type Select Selects the PGM output type Composite (PGM 1 only) (default for PGM1)

AES-Follow AES1 (PGM 2 only)

AES-Follow AES2 (PGM 3 only)

Sync (default for PGM 2/3)

These parameters apply to PGM 1, PGM 2, and PGM 3 outputs.

Page 112: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 112

Table 53: Sync

Parameter Name Description Selection Option

Lock Source Determines the output format of the sync output will follow other source or manually set.

Follow Ext. Ref. — Follow the external reference format

Follow SDI 1

Follow SDI 2

Manual* - the format and frame/field rate will be set by using the Video Format and Frame/Field rate menus for this output

Format Video output format selections. NTSC *

PAL

720p

1080i

1080psf

1080p

Frame Rate Video Frame rate selections.

60

59.94*

50

30

29.97

25, 24

23.98

NTSC Pedestal Apply NTSC pedestal offset Off

On *

10 Field Enable Enable for the 10 Field test sequence defined in SMPTE 318M-B standard

Off *

On

Table 54: Composite (PGM 1 Only)

Parameter Description Options

Format Video output format selections. NTSC *

PAL

720p

1080i

1080psf

1080p

Page 113: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 113

Parameter Description Options

NTSC Pedestal Apply NTSC Pedal Offset Off

On *

Chroma Enable Enable chroma on the output Off

On *

10 Field Enable Enable the 10 field test sequence defined in SMPTE 318M-B standard

Off *

On

Pattern Select

Selects the pattern type for PGM1 composite output.

Color Bars *

Graphics

Color Bars Select bars test signal for PGM 1 composite output

SMPTE Bars (only available when PGM 1 is NTSC)

100% Color Bars *

75% Color Bars

Graphics Select graphic test signal for PGM 1 composite output

Valid Ramp

Shallow Ramp

Safe Title

Safe Action

Multiburst

Line Sweep 100%

Line Sweep 60%

Flat Field 50%

Convergence

Black Burst

5 Step

2T Pulse and Bar

Loading Status 0 - 99%

Completed

Table 55: Time Code

Parameter Description Options

User Bits Format

Determines the content of the output time code User Bits (also known as User Binary Groups)

ST 309 * - SMPTE 309 YYMMDD format

Leitch 12M - Traditional Leitch 12M time code format with AUX bits for the time offset

Source ID - 4 ASCII characters, default is "USER"

Page 114: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 114

Parameter Description Options

Time Zone Determines the time zone to be applied to the output time. This is the offset in hours and minutes (hh:mm) from UTC (Coordinated Universal Time)

Follow Local* - applies the local time zone selection, as set in the Local Time Zone parameter under the Unit Configuration, Local Time

See Unit Configuration > Local Time > Local Time Zone for a list of UTC offsets.

Set Aux Offset Configures for Leitch 12M time code. +/- 12 in 0.5 hrs increments

Source ID

The four character are encoded into the user binary groups 1 through 8. Each ASCII character represents two user groups where the first character (left most) are binary groups 1 and 2 and the fourth character (right most) are binary groups 7 and 8.

<four characters>

Offset Enable Enables adding offset to the output time. Off *

On

Offset Configures the time offset value. hh:mm:ss

Drop Frame For 29/59 fps only, determines whether the drop frame flag is present in the time code output.

Force Off

Force On

Follow Fmt *- The drop frame bit is automatically set high if the output video/time frame rate is 29/59 fps. Otherwise, the bit is set low.

VITC Enable Enables VITC. Off

On *

VITC Line 1 When VITC is enabled, determines the line 1 horizontal video position VITC will be encoded into the SYNC output

NTSC: 10 to 20 (Default is 14)

PAL: 6 to 22 (Default is 19)

VITC Line 2 When VITC is enabled, determines the line 2 horizontal video position VITC will be encoded into the SYNC output

NTSC: 10 to 20 (Default is 16)

PAL: 6 to 22 (Default is 21)

Page 115: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 115

Table 56: Jam Sync

Parameter Description Selection Options

Jam Enable Enables output jam. Off

On *

Force Output Jam Forces the system to immediately jam the output time code

Off *

On

Follow Source Jam Enables the output jam simultaneously when the source jam occurs.

Off

On *

Schedule Select The repetition rate that the Jam occurs Daily Schedule

Weekly Schedule

Monthly Schedule*

Monthly Schedule Date

Repeats the jam once per month on the specified day.

1 - 31 [Day of Month]

Monthly Schedule Time

Determines the time of day the jam occurs. HH:MM:SS

Weekly Schedule Day Repeats the jam once per week on the specified day.

Mon *

Tue

Wed

Thur

Fri

Sat

Sun

Weekly Schedule Time Determines the time of day the jam occurs. HH:MM:SS

Daily Schedule Time Determines the time of day the jam occurs. HH:MM:SS

Table 57: Output Timing

Parameter Description Options

Horizontal Adjusts horizontal phase for the output.

1080 (2K)@ 29/30/59/60:

1080(2K) @ 25/50:

1080(2K) @ 23/24/47/48:

720p @ 59/60 :

720p @ 50 :

720p @ 29/30 :

720p @ 25 :

720p @ 23/24 :

-2199 to 2199

-2639 to 2639

-2749 to 2749

-1649 to 1649

-1979 to 1979

-3299 to 3299

-3959 to 3959

-4124 to 4124

-857 to 857

-863 to 863

Page 116: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 116

Parameter Description Options

525i:

625i:

Vertical Adjusts vertical phase for the output. 1080/2K:

720p:

625i:

525i:

-1124 to 1124

-749 to 749

-624 to 624

-524 to 524

Frame Adjusts frame timing offset for SDI output.

29/30/59/60 fps:

25/50 fps:

23/24/47/48 fps:

-29 to 29

-24 to 24

-23 to 23

Sync 1 Output Parameters

Table 58: Format

Parameter Name Description Selection Option

Lock Source Determines the output format of the sync output will follow other source or manually set.

Follow Ext. Ref. — Follow the external reference format

Follow SDI 1

Follow SDI 2

Manual* - the format and frame/field rate will be set by using the Video Format and Frame/Field rate menus for this output

Format Video output format selections. NTSC *

PAL

720p

1080i

1080psf

1080p

Frame/Field Rate Video Frame rate selections.

60

59.94*

50

30

29.97

25, 24

23.98

NTSC Pedestal Apply NTSC pedestal offset Off

On *

Page 117: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 117

Parameter Name Description Selection Option

10 Field Enable Enable for the 10 Field test sequence defined in SMPTE 318M-B standard

Off *

On

Table 59: Time Code

Parameter Description Options

User Bits Format

Determines the content of the output time code User Bits (also known as User Binary Groups)

ST 309 * - SMPTE 309 YYMMDD format

Leitch 12M - Traditional Leitch 12M time code format with AUX bits for the time offset

Source ID - 4 ASCII characters, default is "USER"

Time Zone Determines the time zone to be applied to the output time. This is the offset in hours and minutes (hh:mm) from UTC (Coordinated Universal Time)

Follow Local* - applies the local time zone selection, as set in the Local Time Zone parameter under the Unit Configuration, Local Time

See Unit Configuration > Local Time > Local Time Zone for a list of UTC offsets.

Set Aux Offset Configures for Leitch 12M time code. +/- 12 in 0.5 hrs increments

Source ID

The four character are encoded into the user binary groups 1 through 8. Each ASCII character represents two user groups where the first character (left most) are binary groups 1 and 2 and the fourth character (right most) are binary groups 7 and 8.

<four characters>

Offset Enable Enables adding offset to the output time. Off *

On

Offset Configures the time offset value. hh:mm:ss

Page 118: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 118

Parameter Description Options

Drop Frame For 29/59 fps only, determines whether the drop frame flag is present in the time code output.

Force Off

Force On

Follow Fmt *- The drop frame bit is automatically set high if the output video/time frame rate is 29/59 fps. Otherwise, the bit is set low.

VITC Enable Enables VITC. Off

On *

VITC Line 1 When VITC is enabled, determines the line 1 horizontal video position VITC will be encoded into the SYNC output

NTSC: 10 to 20 (Default is 14)

PAL: 6 to 22 (Default is 19)

VITC Line 2 When VITC is enabled, determines the line 2 horizontal video position VITC will be encoded into the SYNC output

NTSC: 10 to 20 (Default is 16)

PAL: 6 to 22 (Default is 21)

Table 60: Jam Sync

Parameter Description Selection Options

Jam Enable Enables output jam. Off

On *

Force Output Jam Forces the system to immediately jam the output time code

Off *

On

Follow Source Jam Enables the output jam simultaneously when the source jam occurs.

Off

On *

Schedule Select The repetition rate that the Jam occurs Daily Schedule

Weekly Schedule

Monthly Schedule*

Monthly Schedule Date

Repeats the jam once per month on the specified day.

1 - 31 [Day of Month]

Monthly Schedule Time

Determines the time of day the jam occurs. HH:MM:SS

Weekly Schedule Day Repeats the jam once per week on the specified day.

Mon *

Tue

Wed

Thur

Fri

Sat

Sun

Page 119: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 119

Parameter Description Selection Options

Weekly Schedule Time Determines the time of day the jam occurs. HH:MM:SS

Daily Schedule Time Determines the time of day the jam occurs. HH:MM:SS

Table 61: Output Timing

Parameter Description Options

Horizontal Adjusts horizontal phase for the output.

1080 (2K)@ 29/30/59/60:

1080(2K) @ 25/50:

1080(2K) @ 23/24/47/48:

720p @ 59/60 :

720p @ 50 :

720p @ 29/30 :

720p @ 25 :

720p @ 23/24 :

525i:

625i:

-2199 to 2199

-2639 to 2639

-2749 to 2749

-1649 to 1649

-1979 to 1979

-3299 to 3299

-3959 to 3959

-4124 to 4124

-857 to 857

-863 to 863

Vertical Adjusts vertical phase for the output. 1080/2K:

720p:

625i:

525i:

-1124 to 1124

-749 to 749

-624 to 624

-524 to 524

Frame Adjusts frame timing offset for SDI output.

29/30/59/60 fps:

25/50 fps:

23/24/47/48 fps:

-29 to 29

-24 to 24

-23 to 23

Page 120: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 120

LTC Output Parameters

Table 62: LTC

Parameter Name Description Selection Option

LTC 2 Follows LTC 1

(This parameter applies to LTC 2 only.)

LTC 2 configuration will use the LTC 1 configuration. LTC 2 settings will not be affective until this setting is disabled.

Off

On *

Frame Rate Determines the LTC output frame rate. Use the "Lock to Sync" selections to set the LTC frame rate to that of the SYNC output.

23.98 Hz

24 Hz

25 Hz

29.97 Hz

30 Hz

Lock to Sync 1*

Lock to PGM 1 Sync

Lock to PGM 2 Sync

Lock to PGM 3 Sync

These parameters apply to LTC 1 and LTC 2 outputs.

Table 63: Time Code

Parameter Description Options

User Bits Format

Determines the content of the output time code User Bits (also known as User Binary Groups)

ST 309 * - SMPTE 309 YYMMDD format

Leitch 12M - Traditional Leitch 12M time code format with AUX bits for the time offset

Source ID - 4 ASCII characters, default is "USER"

Time Zone Determines the time zone to be applied to the output time. This is the offset in hours and minutes (hh:mm) from UTC (Coordinated Universal Time)

Follow Local* - applies the local time zone selection, as set in the Local Time Zone parameter under the Unit Configuration, Local Time

See Unit Configuration > Local Time > Local Time Zone for a list of UTC offsets.

Set Aux Offset Configures for Leitch 12M time code. +/- 12 in 0.5 hrs increments

Page 121: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 121

Parameter Description Options

Source ID The four character are encoded into the user binary groups 1 through 8. Each ASCII character represents two user groups where the first character (left most) are binary groups 1 and 2 and the fourth character (right most) are binary groups 7 and 8.

<four characters>

Offset Enable Enables adding offset to the output time. Off *

On

Offset Configures the time offset value. hh:mm:ss

Drop Frame For 29/59 fps only, determines whether the drop frame flag is present in the time code output.

Force Off

Force On

Follow Fmt *- The drop frame bit is automatically set high if the output video/time frame rate is 29/59 fps. Otherwise, the bit is set low.

Table 64: Jam Sync

Parameter Description Selection Options

Jam Enable Enables output jam. Off

On *

Force Output Jam Forces the system to immediately jam the output time code

Off *

On

Follow Source Jam Enables the output jam simultaneously when the source jam occurs.

Off

On *

Schedule Select The repetition rate that the Jam occurs Daily Schedule

Weekly Schedule

Monthly Schedule*

Monthly Schedule Date

Repeats the jam once per month on the specified day.

1 - 31 [Day of Month]

Monthly Schedule Time

Determines the time of day the jam occurs. HH:MM:SS

Page 122: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 122

Parameter Description Selection Options

Weekly Schedule Day Repeats the jam once per week on the specified day.

Mon *

Tue

Wed

Thur

Fri

Sat

Sun

Weekly Schedule Time Determines the time of day the jam occurs. HH:MM:SS

Daily Schedule Time Determines the time of day the jam occurs. HH:MM:SS

Table 65: Output Timing

Parameter Name Description Selection Option

Polarity Determines to apply a positive or negative offset.

+ (plus)

- (minus)

Millisecond Configures the offset in millisecond (ms) range. 0 - 999

Microsecond Configures the offset in microsecond (us) range. 0 - 999

Clocks Configures the offset in clock (27MHz) range. 0 - 26

Audio Output Parameters

Audio Generator

Table 66: Sequence

Parameter Description Selection options

Sequence Mode Enable

Enables the audio sequence test signals on all the outputs.

Off *

On

Sequence Type Selects the audio sequence. A GPI output can be configured to activate at the start and end of the sequence (see GPI output 1 and GPI output 2 menus)

EBU-3341 Loudness Metering *

EBU-3342 Loudness Range

EBU-3304 BLITS

Channel Announcements

Surround Ch. Phase

Page 123: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 123

Parameter Description Selection options

Loading Status Indicates the loading procedure (percentage).

Note: if the loading is not completed, it is not recommended to do any operation to the module.

0-99%

Completed

Start Sequence Starts the selected sequence. Off *

On

EBU 3341 Test Case

Selects the EBU Tech 3341 test case generated.

T1 (Tones2Ch_LUFS -23)

T2 (Tones2Ch_LUFS -33)

T3 (Tones3Ch3Seg_LUFS-23)

T4 (Tones5Ch5Seg_LUFS-23)

T5 (Tones3Ch3Seg_LUFS-23)

T6 (Tones5.1Ch_LUFS-23)

T7 (Pgm2ChNLR_LUFS-23)

T8 (Pgm2ChWLR_LUFS-23)

EBU 3342 Test Case

Selects the EBU Tech 3342 test case generated.

T1 (Tones2Ch2Seg_LRA-10)

T2 (2-5)

T3 (Tones2Ch2Seg_LRA-20)

T4 (Tones2Ch5Seg_LRA-15)

T5 (Pgm2ChNLR_LRA-5)

T6 (Pgm2ChWLR_LRA-15)

EBU 3304 BLITS Channels

Selects the type of BLITS (Black and Lanes' Ident Tones for Surround) audio generated (EBU Tech 3304).

5.1*

6.1

7.1

Audio sequence patterns are used for some special testing. While a sequence is playing, all the audio outputs of VSG-4TSG (except DARS/WCLK) are routed to the dedicated audio signals, and audio routing changes are disallowed.

The sequence is only played once. To restart it, click the Start Sequence parameter.

Every time you turn off the sequence mode, both audio user generators are reloaded again according to the previous settings.

Note: Before playing an Audio Sequence, ensure the audio file is already loaded on board. This appears under "Device Info" (see Device Information (on page 75)). If not, download the file package and upgrade it under "Firmware Upgrade" (see Wave Management (on page 74)).

Sequence parameters configure the audio generator sequence to be applied when Output>Audio Setup>Generator>Audio Mode is Sequence.

Page 124: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 124

Loudness Sequence

The" EBU–TECH 3341" and "EBU – TECH 3342" define dedicated test signals for loudness measurement. Please refer to the spec for details.

VSG-4TSG is able to play out these test signals by selecting the "Sequence Type" as "EBU-3341 Loudness Metering" or "EBU-3342 Loudness Range".

Loudness Gate

To have an accurate measurement, it is necessary to gate the time point for playing the loudness sequence signal for external receiver. It is possible to use a GPI output to have such "gating" signal. When the loudness sequence is playing, the assigned GPI output would be active.

BLITS

The "EBU-TECH-3304" defines BLITS (Black and Lanes’ Ident Tones for Surround) test signal for identifying all the channels in a 5.1 mix, yet was still meaningful when monitoring the stereo

downmix of the 5.1 signal. Please refer to the spec for details.

VSG-4TSG supports BLITS signal with extension to 5.1, 6.1 and 7.1 channels.

Audio Channel Announcement

The "Audio Channel Announcement" pattern is used to identify up-to 8 audio channel. It would play female voice "left", "right", "center", "LFE", "left surround", "right surround", "left auxiliary" and "right auxiliary" in each channel in sequence.

The Surround Ch. Phase

This feeds a 1 kHz sine wave on the L,R, Ls and Rs channels, and inverts the phase for each channel in sequence, as shown in the below table.

Page 125: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 125

Sequence Channel Mapping

The below table indicates the audio channel mapping for each sequence test signal.

Tones

This menu contains eight sub-menus, Tone Gen 1 through Tone Gen 8. Each set contains the same parameters, which configure the audio generator to be applied.

Table 67: Tone Gen (1 - 8)

Parameter Description Selection Options

Frequency Audio generator frequency selection 400Hz

1KHz*

10KHz

Custom (use Custom Frequency to enter value)

Amplitude Audio generator amplitude selection 0 dBFS

-9 dBFS

-12 dBFS

-18 dBFS

-20 dBFS*

Silence

Custom (use Custom Amplitude to enter value)

Custom Enable Enables audio custom mode Off *

On

Custom Frequency Enter custom frequency value 10Hz - 20KHz in 10Hz steps

Page 126: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 126

Parameter Description Selection Options

Custom Amplitude Enter a custom amplitude value 0 dBFS through -60 dBFS in 1 dBFS steps

User

VSG-4TSG supports two audio user generators (named as User Gen 1 and User Gen 2). Each user generator can be individually configured as Dolby E, Dolby D or user wave.

If the User Gen x is configured as Dolby E or Dolby D, then it is considered as a pair grouped. Therefore, it must be assigned to both audio mono channels in a pair at a time. If the User Gen x is user wave, then the audio source could be assigned individually.

Before playing Dolby signal, confirm the Audio File has been loaded to the module. See Device Information (on page 75).

Table 68: User Gen ( 1 and 2)

Parameter Description Options

Type Select Determines which type of configuration settings will be used on the assigned generator.

Dolby E

Dolby D *

Wave File

Dolby D Select Configures the Dolby D test signal. Dolby D 1.0 *

Dolby D 2.0

Dolby D 5.1

Dolby D 5.1MT

Dolby D CS

Dolby E Select Configures the Dolby E test signal. Dolby E 3x2 *

Dolby E 5.1

Dolby E 5.1+2

Dolby E 8x1

.WAV File Name Indicates the selected wave file name. See Wave Management (on page 74) for details.

<String>

Loading Status Indicates the loading procedure (percentage). 0 - 99

Completed

Dolby D

Dolby D is supported for all video formats. The supported Dolby D patterns include 1.0, 2.0, 5.1, 5.1MT and a special pattern Dolby D CS.

Dolby D CS (Channel Scanning) is a 1K tone individually appearing on Left, Right, Center, Lfe (100Hz), Ls and Rs channel for about 2 seconds in sequence.

Page 127: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 127

Dolby D Metadata

The metadata value for each pattern is listed below:

1.0 2.0 5.1 5.1 MT CS

Coding Mode 1/0 2/0 3/2

Low Freq Effect Ch n/a On

Data Rate 56 kbps 96 kbps 640 kbps 384 kbps 384 kbps

Bitstream Mode Complete Main

Dialog Normalization -27 dB

Center Mix Lvl -3.0 dB

Surround Mix Lvl -3.0 dB

Surround Mode n/a Not indicated n/a

Aud. Production Info Yes

AC3 Mix Lvl 105

Room Type Small room Flat M

Copyright Protected Yes

Original Bitstream Yes

Ext BSI1 Present No

Ext Stereo Downmix n/a

Ext LtRt Ctr Mix Lvl n/a

Ext LtRt Surr Mix Lvl n/a

Ext LoRo Ctr Mix Lvl n/a

Ext LoRo Surr Mix Lvl n/a

Ext BSI2 Present No

Ext A/D Type Standard

Ext Surr EX Mode n/a Not indicated

Bitstream identification Standard

Headphone Mode Not included

Dolby E

If User Gen x is configured as Dolby E, its frame rate and location are supposed to be aligned with SDI x respectively. Therefore, it is only recommended to route Dolby E 1 to SDI 1, and Dolby E 2 to SDI 2, unless both SDI outputs are exactly identical (same standard, same output timing etc).

Page 128: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 128

Dolby E Start Line

The Dolby E Start Line can be adjusted at Outputs -> Audio -> Embed SDI x -> Output Control.

Note: Dolby E 1 is only aligned to SDI 1, and Dolby E 2 is only aligned to SDI 2. To play the Dolby E signal appropriately, make sure the word length is not shorter than the Dolby E bit depth.

Supported Dolby E Patterns

23/47fps: 5.1+2

24/48fps: 5.1+2

25/50fps: 3x2, 5.1, 5.1+2, 8x1

29/59fps: 3x2, 5.1, 5.1+2, 8x1

30/60fps: 5.1+2

Dolby E Amplitude and Metadata

The metadata value for each pattern is listed in the below table.

3x2 5.1 8x1 5.1+2 (25/29 fps) 5.1+2 (23/24/30 fps)

Prog 1/2/3 Prog 1 Prog 1-8 Prog 1 Prog 2 Prog 1 Prog 2

Amplitudes -20 dBFS -20 dBFS -20 dBFS -20 dBFS -20 dBFS -9 dBFS -9 dBFS

Bit Depth 16 bit 20 bit 20 bit 20 bit 20 bit 20 bit 20 bit

Coding Mode 2/0 3/2 1/0 3/2 2/0 3/2 2/0

Low Freq Effect Ch N/A On N/A On N/A On N/A

Data Rate Not specified Not specified Not specified Not specified Not specified Not specified Not specified

Bitstream Mode Complete Main

Complete Main

Complete Main

Complete Main

Complete Main

Complete Main

Complete Main

Dialog Normalization

-27 dB -27 dB -27 dB -27 dB -27 dB -27 dB -27 dB

Center Mix Lvl -3.0 dB -3.0 dB -3.0 dB -3.0 dB -3.0 dB -3.0 dB -3.0 dB

Surround Mix Lvl -3.0 dB -3.0 dB -3.0 dB -3.0 dB -3.0 dB -3.0 dB -3.0 dB

Surround Mode Not indicated N/A N/A N/A No N/A No

Aud. Production Info

No No No No No No No

AC3 Mix Lvl 80 80 80 80 80 80 80

Room Type Not indicated Not indicated Not indicated Not indicated Not indicated Not indicated Not indicated

Copyright Protected No No No No No Yes Yes

Original Bitstream Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Ext BSI1 Present No No No No No Yes Yes

Ext Stereo DownMix N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Lt/Rt N/A

Ext LtRt Ctr Mix Lvl N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A -3.0 dB N/A

Page 129: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 129

Ext LtRt Surr Mix Lvl N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A -3.0 dB N/A

Ext LoRo Ctr Mix Lvl N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A -3.0 dB N/A

Ext LoRo Surr Mix Lvl

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A -3.0 dB N/A

Ext BSI2 Present No No No No No Yes Yes

Ext A/D Type Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard

Ext Surr EX Mode N/A Not indicated N/A Not indicated N/A Not indicated N/A

DC Highpass Flt Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled

B/W Lowpass Flt Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled

LFE Ch Lowpass Flt N/A Disabled N/A Disabled N/A Enabled N/A

Srnd Phase Shift Flt N/A Disabled N/A Disabled N/A Enabled N/A

Srnd Ch Attenuator N/A Disabled N/A Disabled N/A Enabled N/A

Line Mode Profile Film- Standard

Film- Standard

Film- Standard

Film- Standard

Film- Standard

Film- Standard

Film- Standard

RF Cmpr Profile Film- Standard

Film- Standard

Film- Standard

Film- Standard

Film- Standard

Film- Standard

Film- Standard

RF Overmodulation Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Embed SDI 1 and Embed SDI 2

Table 69: Output Control

Configures embedded audio groups for SDI 1 or SDI 2.

Parameter Description Options

Audio Enable Turns on or turns off all the embedded audio outputs.

Off

On *

Audio Group (1 – 4) Enable

Enables the specified audio group Off

On *

Dolby E Start Line Selects the start line for Dolby E. (depends on video standard)

Table 70: Source Select

There are sixteen parameters here, one for each channel.

Parameter Description Options

Channel (1A-8B) Source Selects the source for the specified channel.

Gen 1 *

Gen 2

Gen 3

Gen 4

Gen 5

Gen 6

Gen 7

Gen 8

Gen V2A

User Gen 1L

User Gen 1R

User Gen 2L

User Gen 2R

Page 130: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 130

Table 71: Audio V Bit

Parameter Description Options

Ch(1A/1B – 8A/8B) VBit Control

Selects the VBit mode in the audio output Auto Automatically configures the V bit. If the audio pair is selected as Dolby, then V bit is set to 1. Otherwise, it is 0.

Set Forces the audio V bit to 1.

Clear Forces the audio V bit to 0.

Table 72: Audio Non-PCM Bit

Parameter Description Options

Ch (1A/1B – 8A/8B) Non-PCM Bit Control

Configures the non-PCM bit for each audio pair freely.

Auto Automatically configures the non-PCM bit. If the audio pair is selected as Dolby, then non-PCM bit is set to 1. Otherwise, it is 0.

Set Forces the audio non-PCM bit to 1.

Clear Forces the audio non-PCM bit to 0.

Table 73: Audio Word Length

Parameter Description Options

Ch(1A/1B – 8A/8B) Word Length

The audio word length must be configured appropriately for each audio pair.

16 bits

20 bits (defualt for SD)

24 Bits (default for HD/3G)

Note: To play the Dolby E signal appropriately, make sure the word length is not shorter than the Dolby E bit depth.

Page 131: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 131

AES 1 and AES 2

Table 74: AES (1 - 2)

Parameter Description Options

Channel (1A – 2A) Source

Selects the generator for the specified channel of AES( 1 or 2) output

Gen 1 *

Gen 2

Gen 3

Gen 4

Gen 5

Gen 6

Gen 7

Gen 8

Gen V2A

User Gen 1L

User Gen 1R

User Gen 2L

User Gen 2R

Word Length Note: to play Dolby E signals properly, the word length cannot be shorter than the Dolby E bit depth.

16 bits

20 bits

24 Bits (default)

V Bit Control Selects the V Bit mode in the audio output Auto *

Set

Clear

Non-PCM Bit Control Configures the non-PCM bit Auto *

Set

Clear

V2A Video Source Selects which video channel to follow when the V2A pattern is enabled.

SDI 1 *

SDI 2

Analog Audio

Table 75: Analog Audio

Parameter Description Options

Left Source Selects the generator for the left analog channel

Gen 1*

Gen 2

Gen 3

Gen 4

Gen 5

Gen 6

Gen 7

Gen 8

User Gen 1L

User Gen 1R

User Gen 2L

User Gen 2R

Page 132: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 132

Parameter Description Options

Right Source Selects the generator for the right analog channel

Gen 1*

Gen 2

Gen 3

Gen 4

Gen 5

Gen 6

Gen 7

Gen 8

User Gen 1L

User Gen 1R

User Gen 2L

User Gen 2R

V2A Video Source Selects which video channel to follow when the V2A pattern is enabled.

SDI 1 *

SDI 2

NTP and PTP Output Parameters

Table 76: NTP/PTP SEL

Parameter Name Description Selection Option

PTP Master Enable Configures the unit to act as a PTP master device.

Note: If either the Primary or Secondary Source is configured for the PTP, PTP Master will be disallowed (see Setup > Sources > Primary Source and Setup > Sources > Secondary Source).

Off *

On

NTP Server Enable Configures the unit to act as a NTP server at the IP address of the unit

Off *

On

DARS and Word Clock Output Parameters

Table 77: DARS/WC SEL

Parameter Name Description Selection Option

Type Select Selects the type of audio output for the DARS/WC BNC connector

DARS*

Word Clock

Page 133: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 133

Other

Table 78: GPI

Parameter Name Description Selection

GPI Input (1/2) Action Configuration for the GPI input

Source Jam Now

OSD Source ID On/Off

Select Pattern Output

Select Bars Output

NoAction*

GPI Output (1/2) Trigger

Configuration for the GPI output

Loss of Primary Src *

Loss of Secondary Src

Source Time Lock

Source Frequency Lock

Loss of Ref

Loss of GPS

Loss of NTP

Loss of PTP

Loss of ENET

Loss of LTC

LTC Frozen

Loss of VITC

VITC Frozen

VITC Line Mismatch

Loss of PS1

Loss of PS2

Enabled Alarms

Genlock Mismatch

Loudness Gate

Off

GPI Output Polarity Configures the polarity of the GPI output contact

Normally Closed

Normally Open*

Note: With Loudness Gate, output is activated at start of loudness sequence audio generation test and deactivated at the end. Used to coordinate external test gear. See Audio Mode and Sequence under the Audio Setup menu.

Unit Configuration

Opening the Unit Configuration menu reveals the following groups of parameters:

Local Time (on page 134)

Front Panel (on page 134)

IP (on page 135)

DST

General (on page 136)

Enable (on page 136)

Reboot (on page 136)

Page 134: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 134

Table 79: Local Time

Parameter Description Options

Set Date/Time Date and time when the unit will attempt to sync the output source

2011-07-01 to 2031-12-31 (Date)

00:00:00* to 23:59:59(Time)

Local Time Zone Determines the time zone applied to the Local Time. This is the offset in hours and minutes (hh:mm) from UTC (Coordinated Universal Time).

UTC*

range: -12:00 to +13:00 in :30 (30-minute) increments

Apply Now Synchronizes the local time to the selected time source immediately if it is valid. If the selected time source is not valid, or the selected time source is set as "LOCAL Time", then it is synchronized to the "Set Time/Date" menu settings.

Off *

On

Table 80: Front Panel

Parameter Description Options

Default Display Type Determines what appears on the physical front panel interface

Generator

Time*

Generator and Time

Default Time source Determines where the time on comes from Local Time*

GPS IN

NTP IN

PTP IN

LTC IN

VITC IN

PTP OUT

NTP OUT

LTC 1

LTC 2

SYNC 1

PGM 1

PGM 2

PGM 3

SDI 1

SDI 2

High Tally Sets the front panel high tally brightness level (for front panel function buttons).

35% to 100% (80%*)

Low Tally Sets the front panel low tally brightness level (for front panel function buttons).

0% to 10% (5%*)

Screen Saver Enable Automatically enable the screen saver after the configured duration of no front panel activity.

Enable*

Disable

Page 135: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 135

Parameter Description Options

Screen Saver Duration Configures the detecting duration (minute) to start the screen saver.

1 - 20 (3)

Screen Saver Crawling Speed

Configures the crawling speed of the screen saver. The bigger the value, the faster the screen saver moves.

1 - 5 (3)

Auto Front Panel Lock Enables the front panel auto lock function.

If enabled, the front panel will automatically lock after 30 seconds of no front panel activity.

Off*

On

Table 81: IP

These parameters configure Ethernet communication.

Parameter Description Options

DHCP Control Enables the DHCP capabilities of the device Off*

On

IP Address Sets up a static IP Address of the device or shows the IP address assigned by the DHCP server.

See the System Administrator to determine a static IP address that will avoid conflicts.

192.0.0.100*

Subnet Mask Configures the Subnet Mask off the device or shows the Subnet Mask assigned by the DHCP server.

See the System Administrator to determine the Subnet Mask.

255.255.255.0*

Gateway Address

Manually configures the Gateway address of the device or shows the Gateway address assigned by the DHCP server.

See the System Administrator to determine the Gateway address.

0.0.0.0*

Apply IP Activates the IP address based on the menu settings.

Off*

On

Page 136: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 136

DST

One set of parameters configures the Daylight Savings Time start time and end time. There are individual controls for each time code output to enable DST.

General (on page 136)

Enable (on page 136)

Table 82: General

Parameter Name Description Selection

DST On

Month

Week

Day

Time

The rule for when DST will start (+1 hour will added to the local unit time)

<values>

DST Off

Month

Week

Day

Time

The rule for when the DST adjustment will stop being applied

<values>

Table 83: Enable

Parameter Name Description Selection

DST Enable

Local Time

SDI 1

SDI 2

Sync 1

PGM 1

PGM 2

PGM 3

LTC 1

LTC 2

When enabled, determines whether the Day Light Savings time offset is applied to the local time as specified in the On/Off time rules.

Off *

On

Table 84: Reboot

Parameter Description Options

Reboot Triggers a soft reboot on the VSG-4TSG. Off*

On

Page 137: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 137

Status

"Active Time Source" reports which time source is currently used. It could be "Primary Source", "Secondary Source" or "LOCAL Time Freerun" based on the sources’ status.

The sub-menu "Primary" and "Secondary" indicate the detailed status.

The Status menu heading reveals the following parameter groups:

Time Source Status (on page 137)

Primary (see "Primary / Secondary" on page 137)

Secondary

Input Status (on page 139)

Output Status (on page 144)

Leap Second (on page 150)

Table 85: Time Source Status

Parameter Description Options

Active Time Source Reports which time source is currently used. Primary

Secondary

LOCAL Freerun

Table 86: Primary / Secondary

Parameter Description Options

Primary (Secondary) Source

States the selected source for that input

LOCAL_Freerun

LOCAL_PTP

LOCAL_Video

LOCAL_10 MHz

VITC_Video

LTC_Freerun

LTC_Video

LTC_10 MHz

PTP_PTP

NTP_Freerun

NTP_Video

NTP_10 MHz

GPS_Freerun

GPS_Video

GPS_GPS

Lock Status Indicates whether the source is locked Locked

Invalid

Present

Missing

Input Error Displays the time difference between the selected input source and internal time engine.

(string)

N/A

Last Sync Displays the time of the last sync (yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss)

Missing

Lock Frequency Displays the frequency selection <String>

Page 138: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 138

Parameter Description Options

REF Displays reference source Missing

NTSC

PAL

1080p

1080i/1080psF

720p

RS232 Indicates presence or absence of RS-232

Present

Missing

10MHz Indicates presence or absence of 10 MHz

Present

Missing

PPS Indicates presence or absence of PPS Present

Missing

LTC Indicates presence or absence of LTC Present

Missing

PTP/NTP Indicates presence or absence of PTP or NTP

Present

Missing

Page 139: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 139

Input Status

The "Input Status" page shows all the info for each input. The "General" page shows the general info for each source like presence or not. To get detailed info for each input, it is necessary to select "Monitoring Source Selected" and the relevant parameters appear following it.

Figure 48: Input Status

Table 87: Input Status

Parameter Description Options

GPS Reports the presence of GPS. Present

Missing

NTP Reports the presence of NTP. Present

Missing

PTP Reports the presence of PTP. Present

Missing

LTC Reports the presence of LTC. Present

Missing

Page 140: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 140

Parameter Description Options

REF Reports the presence of Genlock. Missing

NTSC

PAL

1080i/1080psF

1080p

720p

VITC Reports the presence of VITC. Present

Missing

Monitoring Source Select

Selects which source to be monitored in detail. GPS

NTP

PTP

LTC

VITC

Local Time

Table 88: GPS

To view these status parameters, first select GPS from the Monitoring Source Select parameter.

Parameter Description Options

Monitoring Source Status

Indicates the status of GPS input. OK

No GPS Time

PDOP Too High - position dilution of precision (PDOP) is too high.

No Satellites

No Usable Sats - no usable satellites

TRAIM Rejected Fix - Timing receiver autonomous integrity monitoring (TRAIM).

Date Indicates the received GPS date <YY:MM:DD>

Time Indicates the received GPS time <hh:mm:ss>

Time Format Indicates the GPS time format.

NA

UTC

GPS

Receiver Status Indicates the extended receiver status. No Signal

GPS Malfunction

Page 141: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 141

Parameter Description Options

Monitoring Source Status

Indicates the status of GPS input. OK

No GPS Time

PDOP Too High - position dilution of precision (PDOP) is too high.

No Satellites

No Usable Sats - no usable satellites

TRAIM Rejected Fix - Timing receiver autonomous integrity monitoring (TRAIM).

Normal

Power Up

Auto Holdover

Manual Holdover

Recovery

Fast Recovery

Discp. Disabled (disciplining mode disabled)

Antenna Fault

RS232 Indicates the connection status of RS232 serial input.

Present

Missing

PPS Indicates the PPS status Present

Missing

Table 89: NTP

To view these status parameters, first select NTP from the Monitoring Source Select parameter.

Parameter Description Options

Monitoring Source Status

Indicates the status of primary server.

Server Not Found

Synchronizing

Server Found

Date Indicates the received NTP date. <YY:MM:DD>

Time Indicates the received NTP time. <hh:mm:ss>

Server IP Indicates the IP address of the NTP server. xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

Page 142: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 142

Table 90: PTP

To view these status parameters, first select PTP from the Monitoring Source Select parameter.

Parameter Description Options

Status Indicates the current PTP protocol port state.

Initializing—The protocol is initializing

Faulty—The protocol is in a fault condition

Disabled—The protocol is currently disabled

Listening—The protocol is listening for other PTP devices

Pre Master—The protocol is preparing to act as a PTP Master

Master—The protocol is behaving as a PTP Master

Grand Master—The protocol is behaving as a PTP Grand Master

Passive—The protocol is currently in an idle state

Uncalibrated—The protocol is attempting to synchronize with a detected PTP Master

Note: To reduce the duration for discovering the PTP master, make the LOCAL Time closed to the PTP master time.

Slave—The protocol is synchronous with the selected PTP Master

Note: If the unit is working as Slave but the Date and Time always show "N/A", that means although the unit successfully recognizes the master, it can't synchronize to the master's time. Check the network environment or the timestamp from the PTP master.

Date Indicates the current PTP date.

<YY:MM:DD>

Time Indicates the current PTP time.

<HH:MM:SS>

Table 91: LTC

To view these status parameters, first select LTC from the Monitoring Source Select parameter.

Parameter Description Options

Monitoring Source Status

Indicates the presence status of LTC input.

Present

Missing

Frozen

Page 143: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 143

Parameter Description Options

Time Indicates the input time value of LTC input. <HH:MM:SS>

User Bits Format Indicates the type of input user bits (binary group) of LTC input.

ST 309

Leitch 12M

Source ID

User Bits Time Zone Indicates the input time zone value if the user bits is ST 309.

N/A

<strings>

User Bits Date/Data Indicates the input date value if the user bits is ST 309, otherwise shows the characters.

<YY:MM:DD>

<strings>

AUX The auxiliary bits info when the time code is Leitch 12M.

N/A

<number>

FPS Indicates the frame rate of LTC input.

23.98

24

25

29.97

30

Drop Frame Indicates the input drop frame flag status of LTC input.

N/A

Present

Missing

Table 92: VITC

To view these status parameters, first select VITC from the Monitoring Source Select parameter.

Parameter Description Options

Monitoring Source Status

Indicates the presence status of VITC input. N/A

Present

Missing

Frozen

Time Indicates the input time value of VITC input. <HH:MM:SS>

User Bits Format Indicates the type of input user bits (binary group) of VITC input.

ST 309

Leitch 12M

Source ID

User Bits Time Zone Indicates the input time zone value if the user bits is ST 309.

N/A

<strings>

Page 144: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 144

User Bits Date/Data Indicates the input date value if the user bits is ST 309, otherwise shows the characters.

<YY:MM:DD>

<strings>

AUX The auxiliary bits info when the time code is Leitch 12M.

N/A

<number>

Drop Frame Indicates the input drop frame flag status of VITC input.

N/A

Present

Missing

TC Detected Lines Indicates the lines where the VITC is detected. N/A

<line number>

TC Selected Line Indicates the time code line selected mode. Auto

<line number>

Table 93: Local Time

To view these status parameters, first select Local Time from the Monitoring Source Select parameter.

Parameter Description Options

Date Local date yyyy-mm-dd

Time Local time hh:mm:ss

Time Zone Time zone selection for local time UTC

range: UTC -12:00 to UTC +13:00 in :30 (30-minute) increments

DST Daylight Saving Time on/off status Off

On

Output Status

Similar to "Input Status", it is necessary to select one "monitoring source" to observe the details for each output.

Table 94: Output Status

Parameter Description Options

SDI (1 - 2) Indicates the SDI output format. SD

HD

DL HD

3G Level A

DL 3G Level B

DS 3G Level B

Page 145: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 145

Parameter Description Options

PGM 1 Indicates the PGM 1 output format. Composite

BB

TLS

PGM (2 - 3) Indicates the selected type BB (for sync)

TLS (for sync)

AES

Sync 1 Indicates either BB or TLS BB

TLS

DARS/WC Indicates the DARS/WordClock DARS

Monitoring Source Select

Selects an output for more intensive scrutiny. SDI 1

SDI 2

PGM 1

PGM 2

PGM 3

Sync 1

AES 1

AES 2

LTC 1

LTC 2

ENET

Table 95: SDI 1 / 2

To view these status parameters, first select SDI 1 or SDI 2 from the Monitoring Source Select parameter.

Parameter Description Options

Standard Indicates the video output standard SD

HD

DL HD

3G Level A

DL 3G Level B

DS 3G Level B

Format Indicates the video output format 1080p

1080i

1080psF

720p

PAL

NTSC

Page 146: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 146

Frame Rate Indicates the video output frame rate 60

59.94

50

30

29.97

25

24

23.98

Output Signal Indicates the selected pattern names if the pattern is Color Bars or Graphic; otherwise, shows "Sequence" or "User Bitmap"

<Pattern name>

Sequence

User Bitmap

Motion Indicates whether the motion function is enabled.

On

Off

OSD Source ID Indicates whether the Source ID is enabled. On

Off

Table 96: PGM 1/2/3

To view these status parameters, first select PGM 1, PGM 2 or PGM 3 from the Monitoring Source Select parameter.

Parameter Description

Options

Output Type Displays the output type on the specified output

Composite

Sync

AES-Follow AES1

AES-Follow AES2

Format Displays the output format on the specified output

1080p

1080i

1080psF

720p

PAL

NTSC

Page 147: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 147

Table 97: Sync 1

To view these status parameters, first select Sync 1 from the Monitoring Source Select parameter.

Parameter Description Options

Format Indicates the Sync 1 output format 1080p

1080i

1080psF

720p

PAL

NTSC

Pixel Offset Indicates the pixel offset applied to the output

<number>

Line Offset Indicates the line offset applied on the output <number>

Frame Offset Indicates the frame offset applied on the output

<number>

VITC Lines Indicates the configured VITC output lines Off

<number>

Time Indicates the VITC encoded date and time yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss

User Bits Format Indicates the selected user bits format ST 309

Leitch 12M

Source ID

User Bits Time Zone Indicates the output time zone for the "Time Zone" field when the User Bits is ST309, or for calculating the output time.

Note: When the User Bit Format is NOT ST309, there is no "Time Zone" field in the output time. But this parameter will still indicate the output time zone for calculating the output time.

<string>

Drop Frame Indicates the selected drop frame mode Off

On

Follow Fmt

Page 148: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 148

Table 98: AES 1 / 2

To view these status parameters, first select AES 1 or AES 2 from the Monitoring Source Select parameter.

Parameter Description Options

CH 1A Source Indicates the selected output source of AES left channel.

Gen 1

Gen 2

Gen 3

Gen 4

Gen 5

Gen 6

Gen 7

Gen 8

User Gen 1L

User Gen 1R

User Gen 2L

User Gen 2R

CH 1A Frequency Indicates the selected output frequency of AES left channel when the source is selected from Tone generator.

<frequency value>

N/A

CH 1A Amplitude Indicates the selected output amplitude of AES left channel when the source is selected from Tone generator.

<amplitude value>

N/A

CH 1B Source Indicates the selected output source of AES right channel.

Gen 1

Gen 2

Gen 3

Gen 4

Gen 5

Gen 6

Gen 7

Gen 8

User Gen 1L

User Gen 1R

User Gen 2L

User Gen 2R

CH 1B Frequency Indicates the selected output frequency of AES right channel when the source is selected from Tone generator.

<frequency value>

N/A

CH 1B Amplitude Indicates the selected output amplitude of AES right channel when the source is selected from Tone generator.

<amplitude value>

N/A

Table 99: LTC 1/2

To view these status parameters, first select LTC 1 or LTC 2 from the Monitoring Source Select parameter.

Parameter Description Options

Frame Rate Indicates the selected frame rate. 30

29.97

25

24

23.98

Page 149: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 149

Parameter Description Options

Offset (ms) Indicates the selected milliseconds (mS) part of the timing offset

<number>

Offset (us) Indicates the selected microseconds (uS) part of the timing offset

<number

Offset (clk) Indicates the selected clocks part of the timing offset

<number>

Time Indicates the LTC output date and time yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss

User Bits Format Indicates the selected user bits format ST 309

Leitch 12M

Source ID

Drop Frame Indicates the selected drop frame mode Off

On

Follow Fmt

User Bits Time Zone Indicates the output time zone for the "Time Zone" field when the User Bits is ST309, or for calculating the output time.

Note: When the User Bit Format is NOT ST309, there is no "Time Zone" field in the output time. But this parameter will still indicate the output time zone for calculating the output time.

<string>

Time Zone Indicates the selected time zone mode UTC

Range UTC-13:00 to UTC +12:00 in :30 increments

Follow Local

Table 100: ENET

To view these status parameters, first select ENET from the Monitoring Source Select parameter.

Parameter Description Options

NTP Server Indicates the active state the of NTP server Enabled

Disabled

PTP Master Indicates the active state the of PTP master Enabled

Disabled

Time Indicates the current output NTP/PTP time yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss

Page 150: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 6

Installation and Operation Manual Parameters and Functions

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 150

Table 101: Leap Second

Parameter Description Options

Leap Second Schedule Date

Indicates the last time that the leap second adjustment was triggered.

yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss

Leap Second Status Indicates the next time that the leap second adjustment will be triggered. If no future time is available, it will show "N/A".

yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss

N/A

If you need to make leap second adjustment, download the Leap Second file from the Customer Service website (it would be available along with the VSG-4TSG release, and every time the IERS announces a new date). Upgrade this file to the module on the Firmware Upgrade page of the web interface. After doing that, check the next leap second adjustment time under "Unit Configuration -> Leap Second".

Page 151: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 7

Installation and Operation Manual Troubleshooting

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 151

Troubleshooting CAUTION: These instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not perform this installation or any servicing unless you are qualified to do so. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

When power is applied to the unit, the display shows the startup screen for about 45 seconds.

Initial Checks If the VSG-4TSG is not functioning properly, first verify the following:

The VSG-4TSG is connected to a power source (12 VDC).

All cables are correctly connected (see Connecting the VSG-4TSG (on page 29)).

Initial difficulties with operation or display can be due to improper setup. Review the Setup menus (see Setup Menu Functions (see "Parameters and Functions" on page 91)) to ensure that the proper adjustments have been made for the signal requirements.

Restarting If a problem persists after the cables are correctly connected and the unit is set up, restart the unit by doing the following:

1. Push and hold the SETUP and SRC buttons for a minimum of five seconds until the SYSTEM RESET message appears on the display.

2. Press and hold the ENT button to reset the unit’s configuration. All front panel and Setup menu selections will be reset to the factory default settings.

Chapter 7

Page 152: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 7

Installation and Operation Manual Troubleshooting

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 152

Problems, Causes, and Solutions Table 102: VSG-4TSG: Problems, Causes, and Solutions

Problem/Symptom Solution or Explanation

The configured day-light-savings time (DST) rules are not applied to the time as expected.

DST is applied to three areas of the VSG-4TSG: local time, sync outputs, and LTC outputs. For local time, changes made to the DST rules are immediate if DST is enabled and are only applied to the local time of the unit. For sync and LTC outputs, the DST rules are applied on the next output jam. Also note, that the start rules must be older than the end rule or no DST offset will be applied.

Local time zone was not jammed to the VITC/LTC source even though the VITC/LTC Read Time Zone menu was enabled.

Local time zone is not jammed with the source. Use the Unit Configuration/Local Time/Local Time Zone menu to change the local time zone.

There are no communications on the Ethernet port

Verify the network settings through the Setup menu.

CCS Navigator fails to discover the VSG-4TSG. The message Failure finding CCS-P host (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx): Timeout appears in the Status window after running a discovery

Navigator must be configured to connect to the VSG-4TSG. To configure Navigator, follow these steps: 1. From the Navigator main menu, select File > Operational Mode > Build.

2. Ensure that the Discovery view is enabled with Tools > Discovery.

3. From the Discovery view, click Options.

4. On the Hosts tab, click Add.

5. Enter the IP address of the VSG-4TSG in the Add a host IP field.

6. Click Options... for the X50,X75, X85, NEO, 6800+, MULTIVIEWER, NUCLEUS, Platinum, EDGE-DPS575, Legalizer, RCP-CCS-1U.

7. Change Communication Type to Point-to-Point.

The default is Broadcast and will not work with the VSG-4TSG. 8. Click OK to close the Add Host dialog.

9. Click OK to close the Discovery Options dialog.

10. Click Start on the Discovery view.

If discovered, the VSG-4TSG will appear in the Status pane as Found System (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) and Found Frame 0 (VSG-4TSG)

An SNMP client is denied accessed to the VSG-4TSG SNMP data.

SNMP clients need to be given the community strings for SNMP access. These strings can be found in the MIB file available for download from the device's Web Page. See Range and Community Levels (on page 167) for details.

Changes to SDI 2 menu settings are not causing expected changes in the output

Check that Outputs>SDI>SDI 2 Follows SDI 1 is disabled

Check that Outputs>SDI>SDI Standard is set to single-link (SL)

Page 153: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 7

Installation and Operation Manual Troubleshooting

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 153

Problem/Symptom Solution or Explanation

Changes to SDI 1 or 2 Format>Standard are not causing expected changes in the output

Check that Outputs>SDI>SDI Standard is set to single-link (SL)

If the problem still exists after troubleshooting the VSG-4TSG, see VSG-4TSG Service and Support (on page 24) for further instructions.

Identifying GPS-3903 or GPS-3903-2 To help with troubleshooting, Customer Service may need you to determine which version of GPS device you have.

To identify the GPS-3903 and GPS-3903-2 in the field, look for the manufacturer’s logo.

Figure 49: GPS-3903-2 (NEW) GPS-3903

The key difference between the two devices is the GPS-3903-2 does not support 2400 baud serial data rate.

Page 154: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 8

Installation and Operation Manual Specifications

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 154

Specifications Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Inputs Table 103: Genlock Input

Item Specification

Input type 1 input, passive looping

Input connector type Electrical, single-ended, unbalanced, mechanical, BNC

Input impedance Hi-Z

Black burst input amplitude NTSC: sync and burst 286 mV, nominal

PAL: sync and burst 300 mV, nominal

Black burst input amplitude tolerance ±6 dB

Return loss less then or equal to -40 dB to 10 MHz

Black burst subcarrier jitter <1 ns (pk-pk) over one horizontal line (when locked to GPS-3904)

Tri-level sync amplitude 600 mV pk-pk nominal

Tri-level sync amplitude tolerance ±3 dB

Table 104: 10 MHz Input

Item Specification

Input type 1 input

Input connector type Electrical, single-ended, unbalanced, mechanical, BNC

Input impedance 50 ohm

Level 2Vp-p ±3dB

Table 105: PPS Input

Item Specification

Input type 1 input

Input connector type Electrical, single-ended, unbalanced BNC

Input impedance 50 ohm

Chapter 8

Page 155: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 8

Installation and Operation Manual Specifications

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 155

Item Specification

Level LVTTL; Vih=2.0 V min, Vil=0.8V max

Edge transition 20ns max

Table 106: LTC Input

Table 107: LTC Input Differential

Item Specification

Input type 1 Differential balanced

Input connector type Electrical, single-ended, unbalanced screw clamp terminal

Input impedance Hi-Z (>20 k) or 600 , selectable with switches

Nominal input amplitude 2.0 volts pk-pk

Min. input amplitude 0.5 volts pk-pk

Max. input amplitude 4.5 volts pk-pk

Table 108: LTC Input Unbalanced

Item Specification

Input type 1 Unbalanced

Input connector type Electrical, single-ended, unbalanced BNC

Input impedance Hi-Z (>20k )

Nominal input amplitude 2.0 volts pk-pk

Min. input amplitude 0.5 volts pk-pk

Max. input amplitude 4.5 volts pk-pk

Outputs

PGM 1

Table 109: PGM 1 Composite Analog Video Output

Item Specification

Connector Type BNC female ST-170, ST-274, ST-296

Output Impedance 75 nominal

Page 156: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 8

Installation and Operation Manual Specifications

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 156

Item Specification

Tri-Level Sync Amplitude 600 mV nominal Tri-level sync terminated into 75

Composite Sync Amplitude NTSC: 286 mV nominal Black burst/75% Colorbars, terminated

into 75 PAL: 300 mV nominal

Composite Burst Amplitude NTSC: 286 mV nominal

PAL: 300 mV nominal

Composite Video Amplitude NTSC: 1000 mV nominal 75% Colorbars, terminated into 75

PAL: 1000 mV nominal

DC offset 0 V 0.5 V (blanking level)

Output Return Loss ≥ 40 dB (0.1MHz -10MHz)

SC/H Phase 0° ± 10º

Output Timing ± 100 nS Reference input to output timing

Table 110: PGM 1 SYNC Black Burst/Tri-Level Sync (TLS)

Item Specification

Connector Type BNC female ST-170, ST-274, ST-296

Output Impedance 75 nominal

Tri-Level Sync Amplitude 600 mV 1% Tri-level sync terminated into 75

Composite Sync Amplitude NTSC: 286 mV nominal Black burst, terminated into 75

PAL: 300 mV nominal

Composite Burst Amplitude NTSC: 286 mV nominal

PAL: 300 mV, nominal

DC offset 0 V 0.5 V (blanking level)

Output Return Loss ≥ 40 dB (0.1MHz -10MHz)

SC/H Phase 0° ± 10º

Output Timing ± 100 nS Reference input to output timing

Page 157: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 8

Installation and Operation Manual Specifications

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 157

PGM 2/3

Table 111: PGM 2/3 Selectable Output

Item Specification

Common Measurements

Connector Type BNC female

Output Impedance 75 nominal

Output Return Loss ≥ 40 dB (0.1MHz -10MHz)

Table 112: PGM 2/3 Sync Output Mode

Item Specification

Tri-Level Sync Amplitude 600 mV 1%

ST-170, ST-274, ST-296

Terminated into 75

Composite Sync Amplitude NTSC: 286 mV nominal

PAL: 300 mV nominal

Composite Burst Amplitude NTSC: 286 mV nominal

PAL: 300 mV nominal

DC offset 0 V 0.5 V (blanking level)

SC/H Phase 0° ± 10º

Output Timing ± 100 nS Reference input to output timing

Table 113: PGM 2/3 AES Audio Output Mode (unbalanced)

Item Specification

Amplitude 1.0V 10%

DC offset 0 V 0.05 V

Output Rise and Fall Time 30 nS to 44 nS (10% to 90%)

Serial Output Jitter 0.25UI

Sample Rate 48kHz

Page 158: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 8

Installation and Operation Manual Specifications

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 158

SDI 1/2

Table 114: SDI 1/2 Serial Video Output

Item Specification

Connector Type BNC female

Output Impedance 75 nominal

Amplitude 800 mV 10%

DC offset 0 V 0.5 V

Video Output Return Loss ≥ 20 dB (5MHz – 270MHz)

≥ 15 dB (270MHz – 1485MHz)

≥ 10 dB (1485MHz – 2970MHz)

Output Rise and Fall Time ≤ 135 ps (20% to 80%), not differing by more than 50 ps

≤ 270 ps (20% to 80%), not differing by more than 100 ps

400 pS to 700 pS (20% to 80%), not differing by more than 500ps

Serial Output Jitter < 0.3UI (see RP184-2004)

< 0.2 UI (see RP184-2004)

< 0.2 UI (see RP184-2004)

Table 115: SDI 1/2 Supported Output Formats

Format Standard Options

SD SMPTE 259M-C at 270 Mb/s 525 at 59.94 Hz

625 at 50 Hz

HD SMPTE 292 at 1.485 Gb/s in SMPTE 274 or SMPTE 296 formats

1080I/60

1080I/59.94

1080I/50

1080P/30

1080P/30sF

1080P/29.97

1080P/29.97sF

1080P/25

1080P/25sF

1080P/24

1080P/23.98

720p/60

720p/59.94

720p/50

720p/30

720p/29.97

720p/25

720p/24

1080P/24sF

720p/23.98

1080P/23.98sF

Page 159: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 8

Installation and Operation Manual Specifications

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 159

Format Standard Options

Dual Link HD SMPTE 372M

4:2:2 (YCBCR) 10 bit

10 bit 4:4:4YCBCR

10 bit 4:4:4:4 YCBCR +A

10 bit 4:4:4 RGB

10 bit 4:4:4:4 RGB+A

12 bit 4:2:2 YCBCR

12 bit 4:4:4 YCBCR

12 bit 4:4:4 RGB ,

1080i/60

1080i/59.94

1080i/50

1080p/60

1080p/59.94

1080p/50

1080p/30

1080p/29.97

1080p/25

1080p/24

1080p/23.98

1080psF/30

1080psF/29.97

1080psF/25

1080psF/24

1080psF/23.98

3Gbps SDI SMPTE 424-2006 level A and B

10 bit 4:2:2 YCBCR

10 bit 4:4:4YCBCR

10 bit 4:4:4:4 YCBCR +A

10 bit 4:4:4 RGB

10 bit 4:4:4:4 RGB+A

12 bit 4:2:2 YCBCR

12 bit 4:4:4 YCBCR

12 bit 4:4:4 RGB

10 bit 4:4:4YCBCR

10 bit 4:4:4:4 YCBCR +A

10 bit 4:4:4 RGB

10 bit 4:4:4:4 RGB+A

1080i/60

1080i/59.94

1080i/50

1080p/60

1080p/59.94

1080p/50

1080p/30

1080p/29.97

1080p/25

1080p/24

1080p/23.98

1080psF/30

1080psF/29.97

1080psF/25

1080psF/24

1080psF/23.98

720p/60

720p/59.94

720p/50

720p/30

720p/29.97

720p/24

720p/23.98

2k formats 12 bit RGB 4:4:4

12 bit XYZ

10 bit 4:2:2 YCbCr

12 bit 4:2:2 YCbCr

12 bit 4:2:2 YCbCrA

2048x1080p/24Hz

2048 x 1080p/23.98Hz

2048x1080p/25

2048x1080p/29

2048x1080p/30

2048x1080p/47.95

2048x1080p/48

2048x1080p/50

2048x1080p/59.94

2048x1080p/60

2048 x 1080psF/24

2048 x 1080psF/23.98

2048x1080psf/25

2048x1080psf/29

2048x1080psf/30

2048x1080psf/47.95

2048x1080psf/48

2048x1080psf/50

2048x1080psf/59.94

2048x1080psf/60

LTC

Table 116: LTC Output 1

Item Specification

Output connector 1 BNC, female

Page 160: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 8

Installation and Operation Manual Specifications

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 160

Item Specification

Interface Unbalanced

Impedance Low-Z (< 25)

Level 2.0 Vp-p nominal into 1k (Low-Z output)

Transition time 40us ± 4us measured at 10% and 90% amplitude

Table 117: LTC Output 2

Item Specification

Interface Differential balanced

Impedance Low-Z (< 25 per side) or 600, selectable with switches on break-out board

Level 3.9Vp-p nominal into 1k (Low-Z output)

2.5Vp-p nominal into 1k (600 output)

Transition Time 40us ± 4us measured at 10% and 90% amplitude

Interface Unbalanced

Impedance Low-Z (< 25)

Level 2.0Vp-p nominal into 1k

Transition Time 40us ± 4us measured at 10% and 90% amplitude

Sync 1

Table 118: Sync 1 Black burst/Tri-Level Sync (TLS)

Item Specification

Number/connector type 1 fixes, 3 selectable BNC, female

Load impedance 75 ohm nominal

Return loss ≥ 40 dB (100 kHz to 10 MHz)

Black burst signal level NTSC: sync and burst 286 mV, nominal

PAL: sync and burst 300 mV, nominal

Black burst subcarrier jitter <1 ns (pk-pk) over one horizontal line

Tri-Level signal level 600 mV pk-pk

DC offset 0 V ±.5 V

SC/H phase 0 ±10 degree

Reference to output timing ±100 ns

Page 161: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 8

Installation and Operation Manual Specifications

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 161

Audio Table 119: DARS

Item Specification

Output connector 1 BNC, female, shared with WC

Output impedance 75

Audio formats DARS, unbalanced

Sample rate 48 kHz

AES output return loss ≥ 25 dB -0.1 to 6 MHz

Output signal level 1 V pk-pk (75 ohm terminated)

AES jitter Less then or equal to 0.25 UI

Table 120: Word Clock

Item Specification

Output connector 1 BNC, female, shared with DARS

Output impedance 75 nominal

Output level 5 V TTL levels

Table 121: Analog Audio Output (Differential Stereo Pair)

Item Specification

Connector Type Terminal block

Output Impedance 600 nominal

Amplitude -20 dBFS = +4 dBu

Frequency Response 0.1 dB (20Hz – 20kHz)

SNR >100 dB (20Hz – 20kHz)

Table 122: AES 1 and 2 Serial Audio Output (Balanced Differential)

Item Specification

Connector Type Terminal block

Output Impedance 110 nominal

Amplitude 4.0V 10%

DC offset 0 V 0.05 V

Output Return Loss 25 dB (0.1MHz – 6.0MHz)

Output Rise and Fall Time 5 nS to 30 nS (10% to 90%)

Serial Output Jitter 0.25UI

Page 162: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 8

Installation and Operation Manual Specifications

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 162

Table 123: OLED Display

Item Specification

General 256×64 OLED display for device configuration and output selections

Table 124: Communication Interfaces

Item Specification

Ethernet 1 Ethernet port RJ-45 10/100 Base-T connector

LTC/GPIO 1 LTC/GPIO connector 26 female pin D-sub

Table 125: Ethernet

Item Specification

Standard 10/100 Base-T conforms to IEEE802.3

Connector RJ-45

Table 126: Power Requirements

Item Specification

Power connector 2 barrel connectors with screw lock

Power input 12 VDC nominal 10.8 VDC minimum, 13.2 VDC maximum

Power consumption less then 25 W nominal

Non-resetting fuse 2.5A, 16 VDC

AC Adapter Included

Table 127: Mechanical

Item Specification

Height 1.74 in. (4.42 cm)

Width 8.46 in. (21.49 cm)

Depth 13.12 in. (33.32 cm)

Weight 3.2 lb (1.46 kg)

Table 128: Environmental

Item Specification

Operating temperature 32° to °122°F (0° to +50°C)

Storage temperature -22° to +149°F (-30° to +65°C)

Humidity (non condensing) Operating: 20% to 80%

Non-operating: 5% to 90%

Page 163: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Chapter 8

Installation and Operation Manual Specifications

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 163

Item Specification

Altitude Operating: 6562 ft (2000 m)

Transportation 24.00 in. (60.96 cm) impact drop survivable in original factory packaging

Pollution degree Pollution degree 2

Standard and Optional Accessories Table 129: Standard Accessories

Item Specification

Standard accessories VSG-4TSG Installation and Operation Manual

Breakout board kit assembly, separately ordered option (not supplied)

Two power cords

Two power supplies

HD26 DSUB with hood For customer-supplied cable to connect to GPI I/O connector

Table 130: Optional Accessories

Item Specification

TM-WRTY-1YR Test & Measurement one-year warranty extension: excludes LCDS, CRTS, and batteries

TM-WRTY-3YR Test & Measurement three-year warranty extension: excludes LCDS, CRTS, and batteries

BLK-4 Blank front filler plate

DRT-5 Double rack tray

DRT-ADP-1 Adapter plate

VSG-4-BRK-1 Breakout panel and 5 ft cable with HD26 pin DSUB Male to Female connectors for the VSG-4 Series

Page 164: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Appendix A

Installation and Operation Manual Pinouts

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 164

Pinouts

26-Pin D-Sub Connector

Figure 50: 26-Pin D-Sub Connector

The 26-pin female, D-Sub connector is used to connect to the back panel of the VSG-4TSG.

Table 131: Pinouts for AUX IO Connector

Pinout Signal

Pinout Signal

1 GND 14 GND

2 PPS IN 15 RS232 DSR

3 PPS OUT 16 RS232 RTS

4 GPI0 17 RS232 CTS

5 GPO2 RETURN 18 RS232 RI

6 GPO2 19 GND

7 GPI1 20 LTC OUT P

8 GPO3 RETURN 21 LTC OUT N

9 GPO3 22 NC

10 RS232 DCD 23 NC

11 RS232 RX 24 LTC IN P

12 RS232 TX 25 LTC IN N

13 RS232 DTR 26 GND

Appendix A

Page 165: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Appendix A

Installation and Operation Manual Pinouts

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 165

Analog Audio Connector

Figure 51: Analog Connector

The 14-pin female connector is used to connect to the back panel of the VSG-4TSG.

Table 132: Pinouts for Audio Connector

Pinout Signal

Pinout Signal

1 GND 8 GND

2 GND 9 ANALOG R+

3 AES 1 + 10 ANALOG L+

4 AES 2 + 11 ANALOG R -

5 AES 1 - 12 ANALOG L -

6 AES 2 - 13 GND

7 GND 14 GND

Page 166: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Appendix A

Installation and Operation Manual Pinouts

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 166

Ethernet RJ45 Connector

Figure 52: Ethernet RJ45 Connector

Table 133: Ethernet RJ45 Connector Pinouts

Pinout Signal Pinout Signal

1 TX+ 5 N.C.

2 TX- 6 RX-

3 RX+ 7 N.C.

4 N.C. 8 N.C.

Power Connector

Figure 53: Power Connector

Table 134: Power Connector Pinouts

Connector 1

Connector 2

Pinout Signal Pinout Signal

Pin (Center) 12 vdc Pin (Center) 12 vdc

Sleeve Ground Sleeve Ground

Page 167: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Appendix B

Installation and Operation Manual SNMP Agent and MIBs

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 167

SNMP Agent and MIBs

The SNMP Agent The agent is an implementation of the snmpd daemon that is part of the NET-SNMP 5.x distribution.

SNMP Agent Formats

There are two formats.

SNMPv1 supports the following SNMP commands:

Get

Getnext

Set

Trap

SNMPv2c supports the following SNMP commands:

Get

Getnext

Getbulk

Set

Notification

Range and Community Levels

There are three supported community levels: Administration, System, and User. To access SNMP data from an SNMP client, a community string is required. Each community level has an associated string. These strings can be found in the MIB file that can be downloaded from the Web server of the VSG-4TSG. See To Download the MIB file for details.

The community strings can be found as comments at the top of the MIB file. The community strings are case-sensitive. Note that these strings are fixed in the system and cannot be changed by the user.

Administration Level

Read/write access to all objects in the following branches:

1.3.6.1.2

1.3.6.1.4

Appendix B

Page 168: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Appendix B

Installation and Operation Manual SNMP Agent and MIBs

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 168

1.3.6.1.6

1.3.6.1.4.1.10039 (Videotek enterprise ID)

System Level

Read/write access to all objects in the following branches:

1.3.6.1.2.1.1 (system)

1.3.6.1.2.1.2 (interfaces)

1.3.6.1.2.1.4 (ip)

1.3.6.1.2.1.6 (tcp)

1.3.6.1.6.3 (snmpModules)

1.3.6.1.4.1.10039.1.320 (vtVsg4TsgSeries)

User Level

Read/write access to all objects in the following branches:

1.3.6.1.2.1.1 (system)

1.3.6.1.4.1.10039.1.340 (vtVsg4TsgSeries)

Behavior

Conforms to RFC1157 (SNMPv1) and RFC1902 (SNMPv2c).

SNMP Configuration Save

Setting OID "versionSavePersistent" = 1 (1.3.6.1.4.1.2021.100.13.0) of the UCD-SNMP-MIB saves the current SNMP configuration to nonvolatile storage. The saved SNMP configuration is loaded at reset.

Traps and Notifications

Conforms to RFC1157 (Traps) and RFC1902 (Notifications).

MIB The MIB is a description of the OIDs supported by the VSG-4TSG SNMP agent and is available as a file download from the device. See To Download the MIB file for details.

Format

SMIv2 subset of ASN.1; RFC1902, RFC1903, and RFC1904.

Page 169: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Appendix B

Installation and Operation Manual SNMP Agent and MIBs

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 169

Range

SNMP Enterprise ID

The Videotek Enterprise ID is 10039. The full MIB tree is:

iso(1).org(3).dod(6).internet(1).private(4).enterprises(1).10039

The VSG-4TSG MIB branch will be called vtVsg4TsgSeries and will be at 1.3.6.1.4.1.10039.1.340.

VSG-4TSG MIB

The VSG-4TSG MIB table will be added to the "vtRelease" table.

Behavior

Conforms to SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c as supported by NET-SNMP 5.x.

SNMP Trapset Utility

The Trapset utility found on the SNMP Support CD is not used for the VSG-4TSG. Instead, use the procedure found in Detailed SNMP Trap Configuration (on page 169).

Detailed SNMP Trap Configuration

Adding a New Trap Target

This section details how to configure traps without using Trapset. The SNMP client must have administrator privileges to create, delete, or change trap target characteristics. Entries must be created in two tables to set up a new trap target address:

1. Create a new row in the snmpTargetAddrTable by sending a createAndWait command (5) to a new instance (index) of snmpTargetAddrRowStatus (1.3.6.1.6.3.12.1.2.1.9).

2. Fill in the following fields in table snmpTargetAddrTable (1.3.6.1.6.3.12.1.2):

snmpTargetAddrTDomain (1.3.6.1.6.3.12.1.2.1.2.index) is set to snmpUDPDomain or 1.3.6.1.6.1.1

snmpTargetAddrTAddress (1.3.6.1.6.3.12.1.2.1.3.index) is target IP address (including port, normally 00)

snmpTargetAddrTimeout (1.3.6.1.6.3.12.1.2.1.4.index) is set to 1500

snmpTargetAddrRetryCount (1.3.6.1.6.3.12.1.2.1.5.index ) is set to 3

snmpTargetAddrTagList (1.3.6.1.6.3.12.1.2.1.6.index) is set to "vsg4tsgTrap"

snmpTargetAddrParams (1.3.6.1.6.3.12.1.2.1.7.index) is set to "v1Vsg4TsgSystemParams" or "v2cVsg4TsgSystemParams"

snmpTargetAddrStorageType (1.3.6.1.6.3.12.1.2.1.8.index) is set to nonVolatile or 3

snmpTargetAddrRowStatus (1.3.6.1.6.3.12.1.2.1.9.index) is set to active or 1

3. Set versionSavePersistentData.0 (1.3.6.1.4.1.2021.100.13.0) to a 1 to save the target address entry.

Page 170: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Appendix B

Installation and Operation Manual SNMP Agent and MIBs

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 170

versionSavePersistentData is a one-shot in that it returns to 0 as soon as the save is completed. This is located in UCD-SNMP-MIB.my. If this step is not performed, the target address changes will not be retained between power cycles.

Changing an Existing Trap Target

Set the desired field at the desired index in the above tables.

The change will overwrite the existing value at the specified index.

1. Set versionSavePersistentData.0 (1.3.6.1.4.1.2021.100.13.0) to a 1 to save the target address entry.

versionSavePersistentData is a one-shot in that it returns to 0 as soon as the save is completed. This is located in UCD-SNMP-MIB.my. If this step is not performed, the target address changes will not be retained between power cycles.

Disabling Trap Targets

snmpTargetAddrRowStatus (1.3.6.1.6.3.12.1.2.1.9.index) - set to notInService or 2. To reactivate, change back to active or 1.

1. Set versionSavePersistentData.0 (1.3.6.1.4.1.2021.100.13.0) to a 1 to save the target address entry.

versionSavePersistentData is a one-shot in that it returns to 0 as soon as the save is completed. This is located in UCD-SNMP-MIB.my. If this step is not performed, the target address changes will not be retained between power cycles.

Deleting Trap Targets

snmpTargetAddrRowStatus (1.3.6.1.6.3.12.1.2.1.9.index) - set to destroy or 6.

The instance will be permanently removed from both the snmpTargetAddrRowStatus.

1. Set versionSavePersistentData.0 (1.3.6.1.4.1.2021.100.13.0) to a 1 to save the target address entry.

versionSavePersistentData is a one-shot in that it returns to 0 as soon as the save is completed. This is located in UCD-SNMP-MIB.my. If this step is not performed, the target address changes will not be retained between power cycles.

VSG-4TSG Alarm Status Table

This table implements a circular read-only buffer of 1000 alarms generated by the device. An NMS can use this table to collect alarms that may have not been received as traps. It is the responsibility of the NMS to keep track of already collected alarms. This generally requires collecting the entire alarm table and ignoring entries that previously collected or received as traps. The astSequence column is useful for determining whether a row has already been collected or received since it is unique to each alarm instance. This table can be ignored if alarms will be handled only as traps.

NOTE: The VSG-4TSG does not use Reported Peak Value related fields. These fields are only supplied to maintain a consistent format across certain Harris Broadcast products.

An alarm consists of the following columns:

Page 171: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Appendix B

Installation and Operation Manual SNMP Agent and MIBs

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 171

Table 135: VSG-4TSG Alarm Status

OID Name Type Description

astAlarmID Integer 0..99 The row index of the table. See .

astAlarmIndex Gauge32 Alarm description index. See Alarm Description (on page 171).

astStartDate Octet String (size 4) Alarm trigger date. See .

astStartTime Octet String (size 4) Alarm trigger time. See .

astTimeCode Octet String (size 4) Timecode, if present, at which the alarm was triggered. See .

astDuration Gauge32 Number of seconds the alarm was triggered. This is only useful on the trailing edge (clearing) of the alarm (astHappening = 1).

astHappening Gauge32 Indicates alarm edge. Leading (triggering) is 0 and trailing (clearing) is 1.

astTriggered Gauge32 Not used.

astCaptured Gauge32 Contains the display freeze sequence number for this alarm. Zero if the alarm is not configured for alarm capture.

astPeakValue Octet String (size 4) Whole numeric part of the reported peak value. See astPeakIndex for more information. See .

astPeakIndex Octet String (size 4) Decimal part of the reported peak value. Also contains the description index. See .

astSequence Gauge32 Device unique ID of this entry.

astInput Gauge32 Indicates the source input (A, B) on which the alarm occurred. See .

Alarm Description

lists the alarm descriptions for the indexes found in the alarm's astAlarmIndex column.

Table 136: Alarm IDs

Index Description

0 Loss of Primary Source

1 Loss of Secondary Source

2 Source Time Lock

3 Source Frequency Lock

4 Loss of REF

5 Loss of GPS

Page 172: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Appendix B

Installation and Operation Manual SNMP Agent and MIBs

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 172

Index Description

6 Loss of NTP

7 Loss of PTP

8 Loss of ENET

9 Loss of LTC

10 Loss of VITC

11 VITC Line mismatch

12 VITC frozen

13 LTC frozen

14 Loss of PS1

15 Loss of PS2

16 SYNC 1 Frame Rate Mismatch

17 SDI 1 Frame Rate Mismatch

18 SDI 2 Frame Rate Mismatch

19 PGM 1 Frame Rate Mismatch

20 PGM 2 Frame Rate Mismatch

21 PGM 3 Frame Rate Mismatch

Alarm Date (astStartDate)

The alarm date column (astAlarmDate) of an alarm is decoded as follows:

Table 137: Alarm Date (astStartDate)

Byte Contents Range

4-3 Year 0..9999

2 Month 1..12

1 (least significant) Day 1..31

Alarm Time (astStartTime)

The alarm time column (astAlarmTime) is decoded as follows:

Table 138: Alarm Time (astStartTime)

Byte Format Change Dig 0

4 Seconds 0..59

3 Minutes 0..59

Page 173: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Appendix B

Installation and Operation Manual SNMP Agent and MIBs

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 173

Byte Format Change Dig 0

2 Hours 0..23

1 (least significant) Unused NA

Time Code

The time code column (astTimeCode) is decoded as follows:

Table 139: Time Code

Byte Contents Range

4 Hours 0..23

3 Minutes 0..59

2 Seconds 0..59

1 (least significant) Frames 0..29 NTSC/525

0..24 PAL/625

Reported Peak Value

Use astPeakValue and astPeakIndex to decode the reported peak value. The digits for the left side of the decimal are found in the astPeakValue. For values that have a decimal part, append the fractional part found in astPeakIndex byte 2.

NOTE: The VSG-4TSG does not use Reported Peak Value related fields. These fields are only supplied to maintain a consistent format across certain Harris Broadcast products.

Table 140: astPeakValue

Byte Contents Range

4 Digit 4 0..9

3 Digit 3 0..9

2 Digit 2 0..9

1 (least significant) Digit 1 0..9

Table 141: astPeakIndex

Byte Contents Range

4 0 NO RPV

1 mV

2 UNITS

0..8

Page 174: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Appendix B

Installation and Operation Manual SNMP Agent and MIBs

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 174

Byte Contents Range

3 IRE

4 dB

5 dBu

6 dBFS

7 deg

8 uS

9 mV or IRE

10 Lines

11 uS

3 0 PAL

1 NTSC

0..1

2 Digits for decimal part 0..99

1 (least significant) UNUSED NA

Notes:

If astPeakIndex (byte 4) = 0, there is no reported peak value. Ignore all other fields in astPeakIndex and astPeakValue.

If astPeakIndex (byte 4) = 11, append a decimal point to the digits in astPeakValue and append astPeakIndex (byte 2). This forms a peak value of type float.

If astPeakIndex (byte 4) = 9, the description string depends on astPeakIndex (byte 3). If astPeakIndex (byte 3) = 0, the description = "mV", if astPeakIndex (byte 3) = 1, the description = "IRE".

For example, the following astPeakIndex and astPeakValue OIDs decode into "23.3 IRE".

Table 142: Example astPeakValue

Byte 4 Byte 3 Byte 2 Byte 1

0x00 0x00 0x00 0x17

Table 143: Example astPeakIndex

Byte 4 Byte 3 Byte 2 Byte 1

0x03 0x01 0x03 0x00

Source Input

The device's source input column is decoded as follows:

Page 175: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Appendix B

Installation and Operation Manual SNMP Agent and MIBs

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 175

Table 144: Device Source Input Column

Index Input Description

0 Indicates source input A

1 Indicates source input B

Trap and Notifications

In addition to the alarm status table, the agent also supports SNMPv1 traps. This can be configured as defined in RFC1157 (Traps) using "vsg4TsgTrap" for snmpTargetAddrTagList and "v2cVsg4TsgSystemParams" for snmpTargetAddrParams.

Alarm Status Table Management

An OID is available to assist in the management of the Alarm Status Table, astAlarmIDStart. Since the Alarm Status Table is a circular queue, it is possible that Alarm IDs can wrap around when the table has completely filled, placing newer alarms at the top of the table, When reading alarm status starting from row 0 under this scenario, more recent alarms will be read before older alarms. To assist in the location of the oldest alarms (at the "head" of the circular queue), astAlarmIDStart will always contain the ID of the oldest alarm.

Table 145: Alarm Status Table

OID name Type R/W Values/Range Unit Default

astAlarmIDStart Integer R Min: 0

Max: 999

--- 0

MIB Definition File

The MIB file is located on the VSG-4TSG web server. Through a web browser, log into the VSG-4TSG and select the Settings button in the top right corner of the page. Click the Download MIB file link and save the file to your local disk. It can then be loaded into most network manager systems or SNMP browsers. See To Download the MIB file for details.

Page 176: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™

Installation and Operation Manual Glossary of Terms

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 176

Glossary of Terms A

AES

A digital audio standard established jointly by the Audio Engineering Society (AES) and the European Broadcasting Union (EBU).

Aspect Ratio

The ratio of horizontal to vertical dimensions. A square has an aspect of 1:1 since the horizontal and vertical measurements are always equal. Current television screen aspect ratios are 4:3 and 16:9.

ATC

Ancillary Time Code.

B

BG

Binary Group. LTC designated bit groups for extended time information such as date, time zone, offset, as well as other user information.

Black

Also color black, black burst (BB). A composite color video signal that has the composite sync, reference burst, and a black video signal.

C

Chrominance

The color portion of a video signal that represents the saturation and hue. Black, gray and white have no chrominance; color signals have both chrominance and luminance.

Color Burst

The portion of a color video signal which contains a short sample of the color subcarrier. It is used as a color synchronization signal to establish a reference for the color information following it and is used by a color monitor to decode the color portion of a video signal. The color burst acts as both amplitude and phase reference for color hue and intensity. The color oscillator of a color television receiver is phase locked to the color burst.

Composite Sync

A signal consisting of horizontal sync pulses, vertical sync pulses and equalizing pulses only.

Page 177: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™

Installation and Operation Manual Glossary of Terms

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 177

Composite Video

A single video signal that includes all color video and timing information. A composite signal includes luminance, chrominance, blanking pulses, sync pulses and color burst information.

CRC

Cyclical Redundancy Check

CSD

Clock System Driver.

D

Decibel (dB)

A logarithmic measure of the ratio between two powers, voltages, currents, sound intensities, etc. Signal-to-noise ratios are expressed in decibels.

DHCP

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.

Dialnorm.

An AC-3 metadata parameter, numerically equal to the absolute value of the Dialog Level, carried in the AC-3 bit stream.

DVITC, D-VITC

Digital Vertical Interval Time Code. Timecode information stored on specific lines in the vertical blanking interval of a television signal.

E

EDH

Error Detection and Handling. A recommended practice defined in SMPTE RP 165. A system to generate and then detect video data errors in serial digital video systems.

Embedded Audio

Digital audio information multiplexed onto a serial digital data stream. Up to sixteen channels can be multiplexed on a single stream of 601 video, minimizing cabling and routing requirement.

F

Field

A picture or picture portion which is produced within one cycle of vertical synchronization. In interlaced systems, a full picture or frame requires two consecutive fields.

Page 178: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™

Installation and Operation Manual Glossary of Terms

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 178

Frame

A single full resolution picture as viewed in either a video or film system. In the case of interlaced video, two consecutive fields provide all of the information of one frame. In non-interlaced systems, one cycle of vertical synchronization produces a frame. A 60 Hz interlaced system, produces 30 frames of video in one second. A 60 Hz progressive (or non-interlaced) system, produces 60 frames of video in one second. Common frame rates are 24 (film) 25, 29.97, 30, 50, 59.94 and 60.

France Inter

French public radio

G

Genlock (Generator Lock)

A method of synchronization involving the generation of a video signal that is time and phase locked with another signal.

GPI

General Purpose Interface

GPS

Global Positioning System.

GPS Time

Global Positioning System time is the atomic time scale implemented by the atomic clocks in the GPS ground control stations and the GPS satellites themselves. GPS time was zero at 0h 6-Jan-1980. It is not perturbed by leap seconds.

I

Installation Categories

Categories of measurements that occur on circuits attached or not attached to a live electrical supply outlet. Installation Categories are as follows:

Category I is for measurements that occur on circuits not attached to a live electrical supply outlet (115/230 VAC). The voltages come from secondary power sources. The secondary power source includes circuits energized by low-voltage sources and electronics such as batteries.

Category II is for measurements that occur on circuits attached to a live electrical supply outlet (115/230 VAC).

Category III is for measurements that occur on equipment permanently connected to the building. The distribution level equipment are usually fixed installations and circuit breakers.

Category IV is for measurements that occur at the main electrical power supply.

Page 179: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™

Installation and Operation Manual Glossary of Terms

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 179

IP

Internet Protocol

ISP

Internet Service Provider

J

Jitter

A deformation of a signal affected by poor synchronization.

L

LCD

Liquid Crystal Display

Leap Second

A positive or negative one-second adjustment to the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) time scale that keeps it close to mean solar time.

LED

Light-Emitting Diode

Local Time

The date/time reported by your PC (as seen by your web browser). If your PC clock is accurate to a second then the other time scales displayed above will also be accurate to within one second.

LS

Left Surround

LTC

Longitudinal Time Code, A SMPTE timecode standard usually recorded onto the linear audio track of a VTR.

M

Mbps

Megabits Per Second

Page 180: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™

Installation and Operation Manual Glossary of Terms

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 180

MJD

The MJD is defined as the JD minus 2400000.5. It should be noted that JD increments at noon while MJD increments at midnight. MJD is thus a continuous count of the number of days that have elapsed since 17 November 1858.

MTG

Master Time Generator.

mV

Millivolts

N

NTP

Network Time Protocol.

NTSC

National Television Systems Committee, the color television system used in the United States, Canada, Mexico and Japan.

O

OLED.

Organic light-emitting diode; a graphical color display for use as television screens, computer displays, portable system screens, and in advertising and information board applications

P

PAL

Phase Alternation Line; the standard color television system in many European and other countries.

Passive Looping

Video and audio signals routed through components, even if power is removed. Signals are not amplified or processed, maintaining transparency.

PDOP. Position dilution of precision (GPS related term).

Pedestal Level

An offset used in a video system to separate the active video from the blanking level by maintaining the black level above the blanking level by a small amount.

Page 181: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™

Installation and Operation Manual Glossary of Terms

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 181

Pixel

A Picture cell or Picture element representing one sample of picture information, such as an individual sample of R, G, B, luminance or chrominance.

Pollution Degree

A measurement of the foreign materials such as conductive dust, gas, and moisture between the internal areas of the product and the outside environment. Pollution Degrees are 1,2 3, and 4.

Pollution Degree 1 describes conditions where no pollution occurs or only dry, nonconductive pollution occurs. This is normal for equipment located in clean rooms. The pollution classified under Pollution Degree 1 has no environmental influence.

Pollution Degree 2 describes conditions where dry, nonconductive pollution occurs. This is normal in an office environment. Temporary conductivity caused by condensation may occur when the unit is not in service.

Pollution Degree 3 describes conditions where conductive pollution occurs, or dry, nonconductive pollution occurs due to condensation. Rooms that cannot maintain the moisture or temperature fall into this category. The location can only protect from outside weather conditions such as direct sunlight, rain, snow, and wind. Industrial areas can fall under Pollution Degree 3.

Pollution Degree 4 describes pollution that generates persistent conductivity through conductive dust, rain, or snow. Pollution Degree 4 is for outdoor locations.

PPS

Pulse-per-second.

Preset

Refers to establishing any condition prior to use on the Program output. This term is used in reference to wipe patterns and is often interchanged with Preview.

PTP

Precision Time Protocol.

R

RS

Right Surround

S

Signal to Noise Ratio -Analog (SNR)

A measurement of the noise level in a signal expressed in dB (decibels) as a ratio of between the audio or video signal’s maximum peak-to-peak signal voltage and the measured voltage of noise present when the signal is removed. Higher SNR figures indicate that any noise introduced by system components will not be perceived in the picture and sound output signals.

Page 182: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™

Installation and Operation Manual Glossary of Terms

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 182

SMPTE

Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers

SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol is an Internet-standard protocol for managing devices on IP networks.

T

TAI

International Atomic Time (TAI, from the French name Temps Atomique International) is a high-precision atomic coordinate time standard based on the notional passage of proper time on Earth's geoid. TAI was synchronized with Universal Time at the beginning of 1958. It is a Non leap second compensated "continuous" time.

TCP

Transmission Control Protocol

TCXO

Temperature Compensated Crystal Oscillator

THD

Total Harmonic Distortion

TRAIM. Timing receiver autonomous integrity monitoring (GPS related term).

TSG

Test Signal Generator.

U

UTC

Coordinated Universal Time is a time standard based on International Atomic Time (TAI) with leap seconds added at irregular intervals to compensate for the Earth's slowing rotation.[2] Leap seconds are used to allow UTC to closely track UT1, which is mean solar time at the Royal Observatory, Greenwich.

V

VITC

Vertical Interval Time Code, a method for recording on to video tape the timecode address for each video frame inserted in the vertical interval.

Page 183: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Appendix C

Installation and Operation Manual Open Source Software Copyright Information

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 183

Open Source Software Copyright Information

PTP License Copyright (C) 2011 Richard Cochran <[email protected]>

This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or at your option) any later version.

This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc.,

51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA.

FreeType License Portions of this software are copyright © 2008 The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.

LibJPEG License This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.

CMU/UCD Copyright Notice Copyright © 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University.

Appendix C

Page 184: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Appendix C

Installation and Operation Manual Open Source Software Copyright Information

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 184

Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000.

Copyright © 1996, 1998-2000, The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and The Regents of the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written permission.

CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.

Networks Associates Technology, Inc. Copyright Notice (BSD) Copyright © 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Page 185: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Appendix C

Installation and Operation Manual Open Source Software Copyright Information

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 185

Cambridge Broadband Ltd. Copyright Notice (BSD) Portions of this code are copyright © 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Sun Microsystems, Inc. Copyright Notice (BSD) Copyright © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California 95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved.

Use is subject to license terms below.

This distribution may include materials developed by third parties.

Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

Page 186: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Appendix C

Installation and Operation Manual Open Source Software Copyright Information

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 186

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Sparta, Inc. Copyright Notice (BSD) Copyright © 2003-2008, Sparta, Inc. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

Neither the name of Sparta, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Cisco/BUPTNIC Copyright Notice (BSD) Copyright © 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

Page 187: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Appendix C

Installation and Operation Manual Open Source Software Copyright Information

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 187

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications, nor the names of their contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co. KG Copyright Notice (BSD) Copyright © Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co. KG, 2003 [email protected]. Author: Bernhard Penz

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

The name of Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG or any of its subsidiaries, brand or product names may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Page 188: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Appendix C

Installation and Operation Manual Open Source Software Copyright Information

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 188

The GNU v2 License

GNU General Public License

Version 2, June 1991

Copyright © 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA. Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

Preamble

The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.

To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.

For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.

We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.

Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors’ reputations.

Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.

The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.

Page 189: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Appendix C

Installation and Operation Manual Open Source Software Copyright Information

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 189

GNU General Public License

Terms and Conditions for Copying, Distribution and Modification

0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program," below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification.") Each licensee is addressed as "you."

Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.

1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program.

You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.

2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:

a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.

b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.

c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)

These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.

Page 190: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Appendix C

Installation and Operation Manual Open Source Software Copyright Information

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 190

Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.

In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.

3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:

a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,

b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,

c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)

The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.

If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.

4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.

5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.

6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’

Page 191: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Appendix C

Installation and Operation Manual Open Source Software Copyright Information

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 191

exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.

7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.

If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.

It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.

This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.

8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.

9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.

Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version," you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.

10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.

Page 192: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Appendix C

Installation and Operation Manual Open Source Software Copyright Information

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 192

No Warranty

11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

GNU Lesser Public License

GNU Lesser General Public License

Version 2.1, February 1999

Copyright © 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA. Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]

Preamble

The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.

This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and

Page 193: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Appendix C

Installation and Operation Manual Open Source Software Copyright Information

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 193

charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things.

To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.

For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.

We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.

To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author’s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others.

Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license.

Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs.

When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.

We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does Less to protect the user’s freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.

For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.

In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-

Page 194: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Appendix C

Installation and Operation Manual Open Source Software Copyright Information

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 194

free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.

Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users’ freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.

The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library." The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run.

GNU Lesser General Public License

Terms and Conditions for Copying, Distribution and Modification

0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you."

A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.

The "Library," below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A "work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification.")

"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library.

Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.

1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library’s complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library.

You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.

2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:

Page 195: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Appendix C

Installation and Operation Manual Open Source Software Copyright Information

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 195

a) The modified work must itself be a software library.

b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.

c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.

d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.

(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.)

These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.

Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.

In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.

3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices.

Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.

This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library.

4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange.

If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute

Page 196: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Appendix C

Installation and Operation Manual Open Source Software Copyright Information

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 196

the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.

5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library." Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.

However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library." The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.

When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.

If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)

Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.

6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer’s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications.

You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:

a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that uses the Library," as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.)

b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user’s computer system, rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with.

Page 197: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Appendix C

Installation and Operation Manual Open Source Software Copyright Information

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 197

c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution.

d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place.

e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.

For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.

It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute.

7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things:

a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above.

b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.

8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.

9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it.

10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.

11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License

Page 198: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Appendix C

Installation and Operation Manual Open Source Software Copyright Information

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 198

and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.

If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.

It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.

This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.

12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.

13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.

Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version," you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.

14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.

No Warranty

15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

Page 199: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ Appendix C

Installation and Operation Manual Open Source Software Copyright Information

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 199

16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

Page 200: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™

Installation and Operation Manual Index

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 200

Index A Accessories

optional • 160 standard • 160

AgentconfigurationSNMP • 164 Alarm status table,

SNMPIXAlarmstatustableSNMP • 167 Alarmsetup • 88 Antenna connection • 35, 37 Audience • 13

B Black burst specifications • 157

C Communication interface specifications • 159 CommunitylevelsSNMP • 164 configuring time • 48 Connections • 29 Control panels

front panel • 51 Coordinated Universal Time • 42 Copyrights

CopyrightsCambridgeBroadbandLtd • 182 CopyrightsCiscoBUPTNIC • 183 CopyrightsCMUUCD • 180 CopyrightsFabasoftRDSoftwareGmbHCoKG •

184 CopyrightsNetworksAssociatesTechnology •

181 CopyrightsSpartaInc • 183 CopyrightsSunMicrosystemsInc • 182

Customer Service • 24

D DARS output

specifications • 158 Default display • 54 Directives

RoHS • 18 WEEE • 18

Display specifications • 159 DRT-5 • 160 DST configuration

DSTconfigurationtroubleshooting • 149

D-Sub connector pinouts • 161

E EnterpriseIDSNMP • 166 Environmental specifications • 159 Ethernet

connector pinouts (RJ45) • 163 Ethernettroubleshooting • 149 specifications • 159

F Failover • 94 Features • 20 Front panel • 51

G GPIO • 131 GPSconfig • 94 Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) • 42

I Initialchecks • 148 Inspecting shipment • 26 Installation

checking contents • 26 connections • 29 Ethernet setup • 39

L Licenses

LicensesFreeType • 180 LicensesGNUv2 • 185 LicensesLibJPEG • 180

Local time • 42 Localtimetroubleshooting • 149

LTC input LTCinputalarms • 88 specifications • 152

LTC output specifications • 156

LTCconfiguration • 94

M Main features • 20 Mechanical specifications • 159 MIB file

MIBfileformatanduse • 165

N Navigating setup menus • 90

Page 201: Videotek® VSG-4TSG™ - BroadcastStore.com€¦ · 14/05/2015  · For more information, see Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS 3904 Receiver. Connecting the VSG-4TSG to a GPS-3903

Videotek® VSG-4TSG™

Installation and Operation Manual Index

© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 2.0 | Page 201

Notifications, SNMP • 165

O Open source software • 195

Cambridge Broadband Ltd. • 182 Cisco/BUPTNIC • 183 CMU/UCD copyright notice • 180 Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co. KG •

184 FreeType license • 180 GNU lesser public license • 189, 195 GNU v2 license • 185, 189 LibJPEG license • 180 Networks Associates Technology • 181 Sparta, Inc. • 183 Sun Microsystems, Inc. • 182

Optional accessories • 21, 160 Outputs, time • 46

P Panels, front panel

controlsIXPanelsfrontpanelcontrols • 51 Pinouts

Ethernet (RJ45) connector • 163 power connector • 163

Power connectors pinouts • 163

Power requirements • 159 Powersupplyalarms • 88 PPS input

specifications • 151 PTPconfiguration • 94

R RASee Return authorization • 24 Reference inputs

specifications • 151 Restarting • 148 Return authorization • 24 Returning products • 24 RJ45 connector pinouts • 163

S Safety

directives • 18 information • 24 Safetysymbols • 17

Service • 24 Setup menus

alarms • 88 GPIO • 131 navigating • 90 sources • 94

Shipping information • 26 Source detection • 45 Sourcejam • 94 Sourcessetup • 94 Specifications

accessories • 160 display • 159 environmental • 159 Ethernet • 159 mechanical • 159 power requirements • 159

Standard accessories • 160

T Terms • 179 Time code output • 29 TM-WRTY • 160 Trapconfiguration • 166 TrapsSNMP • 165 Tri-level sync

specifications • 157 video reference output • 29

U UCD copyright notice • 180

V VITC input

VITCinputalarms • 88 VITCconfiguration • 94

W Warranty • 160 Word clock

specifications • 158 Word clock output • 29